premios. premios.

excelentes excelentes a a optar optar para para www.alpine-usa.com/registration www.alpine-usa.com/registration direcci6n direcci6n Ia Ia en en producto producto su su Registre Registre

prix. prix. des des porter porter rem rem de de tentez tentez et et www.alpine-usa.com/registration www.alpine-usa.com/registration sur sur Enregistrez-vous Enregistrez-vous

prizes. prizes. win win to to chance chance a a for for www.alpine-usa.com/registration www.alpine-usa.com/registration at at product product your your register register Please Please

EUA. EUA.

nos nos legais legais residentes residentes para para somente somente Aberto Aberto EE.UU./ EE.UU./ en en mente mente legal legal residentes residentes ciudadanos ciudadanos para para Solo Solo Unis./ Unis./

Etats­ aux aux legalement legalement residant residant personnes personnes aux aux accessible accessible Uniquement Uniquement residents./ residents./ US. US. legal legal to to only only Open Open

RAPIDA RAPIDA REFERENCIA REFERENCIA DE DE GUIA GUIA

RAPIDA RAPIDA REFERENCIA REFERENCIA DE DE GUfA GUfA

RAPIDE RAPIDE REFERENCE REFERENCE DE DE GUIDE GUIDE

GUIDE GUIDE REFERENCE REFERENCE QUICK QUICK

only) only) (INE-W960HDMI/INE-NAV-60HOMI (INE-W960HDMI/INE-NAV-60HOMI

App App Tunelt Tunelt Alpine Alpine

L------~ L------~

READY READY I I PlAYBACK PlAYBACK PANDORA PANDORA

(()) (()) : : USB USB

WITH WITH WORKS WORKS

r------~ r------~

Life Life for for Maps Maps

INTERFACE INTERFACE MULTIMEDIA MULTIMEDIA HIGH-DEFINITION HIGH-DEFINITION

~ ~

DVD VIDEO DVD TM TM

DIVX. DIVX.

DIGITAL DIGITAL [I] [I] DOLBY DOLBY

0 0

[ [ Bluetooth® Bluetooth® ~iP~d ~iP~d !:l !:l ] ] iPhone iPhone

INE-W960SHDMI INE-W960SHDMI

INE-NAV-60HDMI INE-NAV-60HDMI

INE-W960HDMI INE-W960HDMI

RECEIVER RECEIVER NAVIGATION NAVIGATION GPS GPS IN-DASH IN-DASH

l-EN l-EN

of of the the Owner's Owner's Manual Manual published published on on the the website. website.

http:// http:// www.alpine-usa . com. com. If If required, required, an an ALPINE ALPINE dealer dealer will will readily readily provide provide you you with with a a print print out out

For For details details on on all all functions, functions, refer refer to to the the Owner's Owner's Manual Manual published published on on our our website website at at

PLACE PLACE OF OF PURCHASE: PURCHASE: ______

______

INS~LL~IONTECHNICIAN: INS~LL~IONTECHNICIAN: ~ ~

INSTALLATION INSTALLATION DATE:------

SERIAL SERIAL NUMBER: NUMBER: ______

record. record.

Please Please record record the the serial serial number number of of your your unit unit in in the the space space provided provided below below and and keep keep it it as as a a permanent permanent

IMPORTANT IMPORTANT

Specifications Specifications ...... 18 18

Connections Connections ...... 16 16

lnstallation lnstallation ...... 13 13

Go Go to to a a Destination Destination ...... ll ll

Navigation Navigation Menu Menu ...... 0 0 l l

Map Map Functions Functions ...... 0 0 l l

Hands-Free Hands-Free Phone Phone Control Control ...... 9 9

USB USB Memory Memory Operation Operation (Optional) (Optional) ...... ~ ~ 8 8

iPod/iPhone iPod/iPhone Operation Operation (Optional) (Optional) ...... 7 7

Pandora® Pandora® Internet Internet Radio Radio Operation Operation (INE-W960/INE-NAV-60 (INE-W960/INE-NAV-60 only) only) (Optional) (Optional) ...... 6 6

DVD DVD Operation Operation ...... 6 6

MP3/WMA/ MP3/WMA/ AAC AAC Operation Operation ...... 5 5

Radio/RBDS Radio/RBDS Operation Operation ...... 5 5

Getting Getting Started Started ...... 3 3

CAUTION CAUTION ...... 2 2

WARNING WARNING ...... 2 2

. . Contents Contents WARNING

DO NOT INSTALL IN LOCATIONS WHICH MIGHT HINDER VEHICLE OPERATION, SUCH AS THE STEERING WHEEL OR ~WARNING SHIFT LEVER. Doing so may obstruct forward vision or hamper movement etc., and This symbol means important instructions. Failure results in serious accident. to heed them can result in serious injury or death. DO NOT FOLLOW ROUTE SUGGESTIONS IF THE NAVIGATION DO NOT OPERATE ANY FUNCTION THAT TAKES YOUR SYSTEM INSTRUCTS YOU TO PERFORM AN UNSAFE OR ATTENTION AWAY FROM SAFELY DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE. ILLEGAL MANEUVER, OR PLACES YOU IN AN UNSAFE Any function that requires your prolonged attention should only be SITUATION OR AREA. performed after coming to a complete stop. Always stop the vehicle in a This product is not a substitute for your personal judgment. Any route safe location before performing these functions. suggestions by this system should never supersede any local traffic Failure to do so may result in an accident. regulations or your personal judgment or knowledge of safe driving practice. KEEP SMALL OBJECTS SUCH AS SCREWS OUT OF THE REACH OF CHILDREN. Swallowing them may result in serious injury. If swallowed, consult a physician immediately. KEEP THE VOLUME AT A LEVEL WHERE YOU CAN STILL HEAR ~CAUTION OUTSIDE NOISES WHILE DRIVING. Excessive volume levels that obscure sounds such as emergency vehicle This symbol means important instructions. Failure sirens or road warning signals (train crossings, etc.) can be dangerous to heed them can result in injury or material and may result in an accident. LISTENING AT LOUD VOLUME property damage. LEVELS IN A CAR MAY ALSO CAUSE HEARING DAMAGE. DO NOT DISASSEMBLE OR ALTER. HALT USE IMMEDIATELY IF A PROBLEM APPEARS. Doing so may result in an accident, fire or electric shock. Failure to do so may cause personal injury or damage to the product. Return it to your authorized Alpine dealer or the nearest Alpine Service USE ONLY IN CARS WITH A 12 VOLT NEGATIVE GROUND. Center for repairing. (Check with your dealer if you are not sure.) Failure to do so may result in fire, etc. HAVE THE WIRING AND INSTALLATION DONE BY EXPERTS. The wiring and installation of this unit requires special technical skill USE THE CORRECT AMPERE RATING WHEN REPLACING and experience. To ensure safety, always contact the dealer where you FUSES. purchased this product to have the work done. Failure to do so may result in fire or electric shock. USE SPECIFIED ACCESSORY PARTS AND INSTALL THEM DO NOT BLOCK VENTS OR RADIATOR PANELS. SECURELY. Doing so may cause heat to build up inside and may result in fire. Be sure to use only the specified accessory parts. Use of other than USE THIS PRODUCT FOR MOBILE 12V APPLICATIONS. designated parts may damage this unit internally, or may not securely Use for other than its designed application may result in fire, electric install the unit in place. This may cause parts to become loose resulting shock or other injury. in hazards or product failure. DO NOT PLACE HANDS, FINGERS OR FOREIGN OBJECTS IN ARRANGE THE WIRING SO IT IS NOT CRIMPED OR PINCHED INSERTION SLOTS OR GAPS. BY A SHARP METAL EDGE. Doing so may result in personal injury or damage to the product. Route the cables and wiring away from moving parts (like the seat rails) MAKE THE CORRECT CONNECTIONS. or sharp or pointed edges. This will prevent crimping and damage to the wiring. If wiring passes through a hole in metal, use a rubber grommet Failure to make the proper connections may result in fire or product to prevent the wire's insulation from being cut by the metal edge of the damage. hole. BEFORE WIRING, DISCONNECT THE CABLE FROM THE DO NOT INSTALL IN LOCATIONS WITH HIGH MOISTURE OR NEGATIVE BATTERY TERMINAL. DUST. Failure to do so may result in electric shock or injury due to electrical Avoid installing the unit in locations with high incidence of moisture shorts. or dust. Moisture or dust that penetrates into this unit may result in DO NOT SPLICE INTO ELECTRICAL CABLES. product failure. Never cut away cable insulation to supply power to other equipment. Doing so will exceed the current carrying capacity of the wire and result in fire or electric shock. DO NOT DAMAGE PIPE OR WIRING WHEN DRILLING HOLES. When drilling holes in the chassis for installation, take precautions so as not to contact, damage or obstruct pipes, fuel lines, tanks or electrical wiring. Failure to take such precautions may result in fire. DO NOT USE BOLTS OR NUTS IN THE BRAKE OR STEERING SYSTEMS TO MAKE GROUND CONNECTIONS. Bolts or nuts used for the brake or steering systems (or any other safety-related system), or tanks should NEVER be used for installations or ground connections. Using such parts could disable control of the vehicle and cause fire, etc.

2-EN Owner's manual Touch operation, Location of Controls, Turning Power On or Off . Getting Started

Accessory List

INE-W960/INE-NAV-60/INE-W960S ...... 1 USB extension cable ...... 1 Power cable ...... 1 Microphone ...... 1 Flush head screw (M5x8) ...... 6 Mounting sleeve ...... 1 Screw (M5x8) ...... 8 Face plate ...... 1 GPS Antenna ...... 1 Bracket key ...... :...... 2 Antenna mounting plate ...... 1 Owner's Manual ...... 1set CAMERA/ AU X/PRE OUT cable ...... 1

Touch operation

You can operate the system by using the touch panel on the screen.

• Common onscreen buttons : Returns to the previous screen. Depending on the function, this button may cancel the operations .. performed on the screen. D: Closes the window.

Location of Controls

~ (Eject) button ® ® 11' button Ejects a disc. Each time you press this button, the Navigation mode AtV (UP/DOWN) button and the AudioNisual Source mode are changed alternately. Press to adjust the volume. Press and hold for at least 3 seconds to activate the MUTE/

3-EN

4-EN 4-EN

2 2

Press Press and and hold hold the the MUTE MUTE button button for for at at least least 3 3 seconds seconds to to turn turn the the power power off. off.

The The system system is is turned turned on. on.

1 1

Turn Turn the the ignition ignition key key to to the the ACC ACC or or ON ON position. position.

Turning Turning Power Power On On or or Off Off

5 -EN -EN

------1 ------1 Finds Finds beginning beginning of of next next folder folder

screen screen

------.J ------.J Finds Finds beginning beginning of of previous previous folder folder '------D i splays splays the the search search

Pause Pause and and Playback------

Playing Playing time time ------

--- Repeat Repeat Playback Playback

Displays Displays the the search search screen---~ screen---~

--- Random Random Play Play

Current Current song song no./Total no./Total song song no . .

2 2 seconds seconds

when when touched touched for for at at least least

seconds seconds

next next file / Fast - forwa rds rds

touched touched for for at at least least 2 2

Finds Finds the the beginning beginning of of the the

starts / Fast - reverses reverses when when

second second after after playback playback

information information

d i splay splay

previous previous file file within within one one

...------MP3/WMA / AAC AAC

the the current current file / Finds Finds a a

Finds Finds the the beg i nning nning of of

MP3/WMA/AAC MP3/WMA/AAC Operation Operation

Owner's Owner's CD/MP3/WMN CD/MP3/WMN manua l l AAC AAC

------.J ------.J Memorises Memorises stations stations automatically automatically

'------Displays '------Displays Select Select PTY PTY screen screen

L...------Seek Seek mode mode indicator indicator ------' ------' Changes Changes text text information information

Changes Changes tuning tuning mode mode -----' -----'

preset preset station. station.

memorise memorise the the current current station station as as a a

Touch Touch for for at at least least 2 2 seconds seconds to to

short short touch. touch.

Switches Switches band band

D1splays D1splays the the preset preset stations stations with with a a

Preset Preset button------. button------.

Increases Increases frequency frequency

Radio Radio information information display display

Decreases Decreases frequency-----.. frequency-----..

. . Radio/RBDS Radio/RBDS Operation Operation

Owne r 's 's manua l l Radio/RBDS Radio/RBDS Owner's manual DVD DVD Operation

When you touch the DVD playback screen, the DVD operation screen is displayed. The following is an example of the DVD-VIDEO operation screen.

Finds the beginning of the Finds the beginning of current chapter/Finds a next chapter/Fast-forwards previous chapter within when touched for at least one second after playback 2 seconds starts/Fast-reverses when touched for at least 2 seconds DVD information display-1

DVD information display-2 ---

Playing time------Repeat Playback

Pause and PI Changes operation button

Displays Top Menu screen ------1 L------Displays Menu screen

Switches Angle ------. .------Switches Subtitles 1 Displays numeric keypad -----­ 10Key Angle1 Audto Sublitle K :~ (9)/ input mode screen T Switches Audio Tracks ------.J TL------Changes operation button

Owner's manual Pandora~ internet radio (optional) Pandora® Internet Radio Operation (INE-W960/INE-NAV-60 only) (Optional)

• Display example for iPhone Pandora Radio screen Artwork display------. ..------Pandora information display

"Thumbs Down" feedback "Thumbs Up" feedback----..,. Bookmark Artist

Bookmark Track ------QuikMix Play indicator Creates a New Station from Playing time ------­ the free word search Pause and Playback ------You can enter a keyword and search for Artist/Song.

Skip to the next song ______. L------Creates a New Station from the currently received track Displays the search screen ------1 information

L------Creates a New Station from the currently received artist information

6 -EN Owner's manual iPod/iPhone (Optional) . iPod/iPhone Operation (Optional)

A separately sold USB iPod/iPhone AV cable (KCU-46 1i V) or a sepa rately sold Lightning to USB cable (KCU-47 1i) is required depending on the type of iPod/iPhone. Audio mode

Artwork display ------..., ,------iPod/iPhone information display Finds the beginning of the current file/Finds a previous Finds the beginning of the file within one second after next file/Fast-forwards playback starts/Fast-reverses when touched for at least when touched for at least 2 2 seconds seconds Current song no./Total song no. --- Random Play Displays the search screen --­ Playing time* ------Repeat Playback

Pause and Playback -----

Finds beginning of previous Playlist/ '------Displays the search screen Artist/Aibum/Podcast/Genre/Composer

Direct switch mode icon ------' '------Finds beginning of next Playlist/Artist/Aibum/ Podcast/Genre/Composer * Playback starts from the position (time) you touch on the time bar.

Searching for a Music File 3 Touch the desired artist's name.

For example: Searching by Artist name 11:• ·.. !\.·.t X ALL ... :i ALPINE ... .. 1 Touch [~(Search)] during playback. Afp,ne ... Domestic ...... 2 Touch [Artists]. H1p HopiRap ... =::, Search X ~ ·~ rg ');'.. The Albums search screen of the selected artist is :,,· ..: ... ·\t•.l"', displayed.

,~~~ Touching[..,.] of the desired artist wil l play back all .. li IJ.'i i] X \,• songs of the selected arti st. ...., 4 Touch the desired album's name. All songs of the selected album are displayed. Touching[..,.] of the desired album will play back all songs of the selected album.

S Touch the desired song's name. The selected song is played back.

• Touching ~] of ''ALL" will play back all songs in the list.

7-EN

8 -EN -EN

• • Some Some DivX DivX fil e s s stored stored in in a a U S B B memory memory cannot cannot b e e op e rated / played. played.

• • Divx • • files files s tored tored in in a a USB USB m e mory mory device device and and prot e ct e d d by by DRM DRM (Digital (Digital Right s s Mana ge m e nt ) c ) annot annot b e e played. played.

T._ T.______Changes Changes operation operation button button

6 / / Switches Switches Audio Audio Tracks Tracks ------Audto Audto Suh'tflp Suh'tflp

...... ------Switches Switches Subtitles Subtitles

Finds Finds beginning beginning of of next next folder folder ------' ------'

Finds Finds beginning beginning of of previous previous folde r r ------' ------' '------Displays Displays the the search search screen screen

Stop Stop Playback Playback ------' ------' '------Changes Changes operation operation button button

Pause Pause and and Playback Playback ------, ------, Repeat Repeat Playback Playback

Displays Displays the the search search screen screen --~ --~

Playing Playing time time

Divx • • information information d i splay-2 splay-2

2 2 seconds seconds

when when touched touched for for at at least least at at least least 2 2 seconds seconds

next next file / Fast - forwards forwards reverses reverses when when touched touched for for

Finds Finds the the beginning beginning of of after after playback playback starts / Fast­

file file within within one one second second

current current file / Finds Finds a a previous previous

Finds Finds the the beginning beginning display of of the the - 1 1

r------Divx • • information information

Video Video mode mode

Refer Refer to to the the "MP3!WMN "MP3!WMN AAC AAC Operation" Operation" (page (page 5) 5) for for info r mat i on on on on mus i c. c.

interna l l p l ayer ayer of of this this system. system.

You You can can play play back back m u sic sic fi l es es (MP3!WMA/AAC) (MP3!WMA/AAC) and and video video files files (D i vX•) vX•) stored stored in in a a USB USB memory memory dev i ce ce on on the the

USB USB Memory Memory Operation Operation (Optional) (Optional)

Owner's Owner's man u al al USB USB Memory Memory (Optional) (Optional)

9 -EN -EN

an d d Hands Hands F ree ree Dev Dev ce. ce.

B o th : : Sets Sets for for use use as as both both an an Audio Audio device device

Hand s- free : : Se t s s fo r u r se se a s a a s Han s s d Free Free Device. Device.

Audio : : Se t s s for for u s e a e s a s n n A ud io io device . .

- again again to to cance l t l he he mute mute mo d e . .

Du ri ng ng t h e e mute mute mode, - i s s h i ghlighted . . Touc h h

1 1 Touch Touch [-]during [-]during a a conversation. conversation.

You You can can t empora r ily ily lower lower the the m i crophone crophone l eve l l to to 0 . .

Muting Muting the the Speech Speech Volume Volume

device device you you want want to to connect connect from from the the list. list.

The The call call

finishes. finishes.

S S

Touch Touch [Audio], [Audio], [Hands-free] [Hands-free] or or [Both] [Both] of of the the

1 1 Touch[ ~ ]. ].

Hanging Hanging up up the the Telephone Telephone

The The call call sta r ts . .

2 2 .l .l [ J ] ] Touch Touch or or press press (PHONE) (PHONE) button. button.

4 4 Touch Touch [Search] [Search] of"No of"No Device:' Device:'

an an incoming incoming call call display. display.

1 1 An An incoming incoming call call triggers triggers the the ringtone ringtone and and

3 3

Touch Touch [Set [Set BLUETOOTH BLUETOOTH Device]. Device].

Answering Answering a a Call Call

2 2 [P...I [P...I Touch Touch (BLUETOOTH)] . .

compatible compatible d ev ic e e and and touch touch " Y es." es."

. . 0 0 t t D D ·7 ·7 t _r-. _r-. '' '' sure sure th e e sam e e pa s sk ey ey is is displayed displayed on on the the BLUETOOTH BLUETOOTH ! !

If If a 6 6 a character character

Passkey Passkey appears appears on on this this device, device, mak e e

[SETUP ] ] icon icon

the the Passcode Passcode using using the the BLUETOOTH BLUETOOTH compatibl e e devi ce. ce.

1 1

Touch Touch [Setup] [Setup] icon icon of of Top Top banner. banner. a 4 4 a or or 6 6 char a cter cter Passcode Passcode appears appears on on this this d e vice , e , nter nter

on on the the de v ic e e v e rsi If If o n n and and SSP SSP ( Simple Simple Secure Secure Pairing). Pairing).

• • The The BLUETOOTH BLUETOOTH r e gistration gistration proc e ss ss differs differs dependin g g

pa i ri n g g at at any any t i me. me.

mobil e e phones. phones.

You You

ca

n

, t , h e r efore, efore, sea

r c h h fo r r a a B L UETOOT

H H device device fo r r

• •

You You can can register register up up to to 3 3 BLUETOOTH BLUETOOTH c ompatibl e e

un i t. t.

The The BL UC TOO TH TH function function is is a l ways ways avll i la bl c c o n n thi s s normal normal mode . .

message message appears appears and and the the device device returns returns to to compatible compatible device device (Pairing) (Pairing)

6 6

When When the the device device registration registration

is is complete, complete,

a a

How How to to connect connect to to a a BLUETOOTH BLUETOOTH

W960/ I I N N E - N AV-60/ 1 1 N N E- W960S. W960S.

H a nd s- fr ee ee calls calls a r e e poss i b l e e when when us i ng ng an an HFP HFP (Hands-F r ee ee P r ofile) ofile) co m pat i ble ble mobi l e e pho n e e w i th th the I NE­

Hands-Free Hands-Free Phone Phone Control Control

Owner's Owner's BLUETOOTH BLUETOOTH manua l l Setting, Setting, BLUETOOTH BLUETOOTH Operation Operation Map Functions

Below is an overview of different buttons and icons on the map display. For more detailed information about this screen, please see the Owner's Manual.

.----- Next Street Name

Distance to next Manoeuvre

Trip Information ------_.; Displaying AudioNisual Information You can display the currently Map Orientation------~ playing information (Frequency, Track No., etc.) in the Indicator Access the menu -----' Bar of the Navigation screen.

'------Current Street Name

Navigation Menu

To access the Navigation Menu, touch [ - ].

Route ------~ Get route information, edit r------Information the route (set, delete, optimise Get access to useful add-ons like waypoints, optimise route), see Picture Viewer, Unit Converter, the route overview, avoid special Calculator, Trip Monitor, sections, specific roads, the Fuel Consumption, Country route ahead, save, load, delete Information. the route, simulate navigation, change route settings, check for the itinerary and for max. 7 route Settings alternatives. Allows you to customize various characteristics of your navigation Goto ------__J system's look and feel. Set destinations using any of 9 different input methods (Find Address, Postcode, Find Places (POl), Map, Address book, History, Coordinate, Picture, Free-form '------Map Search). Access the Map

10-EN Go to a Destination

The following example briefly describes how to input a destination.

1 Touch [Go to] from Navigation Menu.

2 Select a destination input method. ([Find Address] is selected.)

• You can touch [Results) to display the candidate list.

3 To change the State/Province, touch the button with the country name. Enter a State/Province name and select the State/ Province from the list. 4 Type in the city name or postcode until displayed in the selection list. Select the matching entry.

• You can touch [Results) to display the candidate list

11-EN

12 -EN -EN

and and start start navigation. navigation.

7 7 Touch Touch [Select] [Select] to to initialize initialize route route calculation calculation

access access the the confirmation confirmation screen. screen.

6 6 Enter Enter a a house house number. number. Touch Touch [Done] [Done] to to

list. list.

• • You You can can touch touch [Results) [Results) to to display display the the candidate candidate

entry. entry.

in in the the selection selection list. list. Select Select the the matching matching

5 5 Type Type in in the the street street name name until until displayed displayed Owner's manual Installation Installation

• When making connections to the vehicle's electrical system, be aware of the factory installed components 3 Mounting the Microphone. (e.g. on-board computer). Do not tap into these leads to For safe use, make sure of the following: provide power for this unit. When connecting the INE­ • location is stable and firm. W960/INE-NAV-60/INE- W960S to the fuse box, make • driver's view and operations are not obstructed. sure the fuse for the intended circuit of the INE- W960/ • microphone is located where the driver's voice INE-NAV-60/INE- W960S has the appropriate amperage. can be easily picked up (on the sun visor, etc.). Failure to do so may result in damage to the unit and! or the vehicle. When in doubt, consult your Alpine dealer. When you speak into the microphone, you should • The Display must be completely retracted in the casing not have to change your driving posture. This may when installing. If it is not, problems may occur. cause a distraction, taking your attention away from safely driving your vehicle. Carefully consider direction and distance while mounting the Install at an angle between horizontal 1 microphone. Confirm that the driver's voice can be and 30°. Note that installing at an angle easily picked up at the selected location. outside of this range will result in a loss of Microphone performance and possibly damage. ,.. ,., ... I II I II II f' ... , I ...

' I I I I I

2 Mounting the GPS Antenna inside the vehicle. 4 Remove the mounting sleeve from the Clean the mounting location. main unit. 2 Put on the GPS Antenna mounting plate.

3 Mount the GPS Antenna. This unit

Bracket keys ~~ (Included)

Antenna mounting plate

• Mount the GPS Antenna on a flat plane of the dash board or rear tray. • Some thermal reflection type or thermal absorption type glass may interrupt high frequency waves. If reception is poor with the antenna installed inside the car, try to mount the antenna outside the car. • Make sure the GPS Antenna is not covered (obstructed) by any metallic surface or object.

13-EN

14-EN 14-EN

dashboard. dashboard.

and and will will not not accidentally accidentally come come out out from from the the

ensures ensures that that the the unit unit is is properly properly locked locked

into into the the dashboard dashboard until until it it clicks. clicks. This This

6 6 Slide Slide the the INE-W960/INE-NAV-60/INE-W960S INE-W960/INE-NAV-60/INE-W960S

the the chosen chosen mounting mounting location. location.

• • For For the the screw screw marked marked "*2," "*2," use use an an appropriate appropriate screw screw for for

Chassis Chassis Ground Ground

Lead Lead This This unit unit

Strap Strap

Mounting Mounting

Metal Metal

Bolt Bolt Stud Stud

/ /

~ ~

......

HexNut(MS) HexNut(MS)

Screw Screw

described described in in the the CONNECTION CONNECTION section. section.

NAV-60/INE-W960S NAV-60/INE-W960S according according to to details details

locating locating them them against against sharp sharp or or pointed pointed edges. edges.

Connect Connect all all the the

leads leads

of of

the the INE-W960/INE­

them them into into movable movable parts, parts, such such as as a a seat seat rail, rail, or or by by

the the vehicle's vehicle's chassis. chassis.

• • Fix Fix the the cables cables carefully. carefully. Do Do not not damage damage them them by by tucking tucking

spot spot using using a a screw(* screw(* 1} 1} already already attached attached to to

or or

a a (*)) (*)) clean, clean,

bare bare metal metal spot spot on on the the vehicle's vehicle's chassis. chassis.

ground ground lead lead of of the the unit unit to to a a clean clean

metal metal

installed installed screw screw on on a a metal metal part part of of the the vehicle vehicle (marked (marked

mounting mounting strap strap

(not (not

supplied}. supplied}. Secure Secure the the

* * To To securely securely connect connect the the ground ground lead, lead, use use

an an already already

S S Reinforce Reinforce the the head head unit unit with with the the metal metal

3 3

Mounting Mounting the the unit unit in in a a car. car.

*2 *2 The The supplied supplied face face plate plate may may be be mounted. mounted.

"Connections" "Connections" (page (page 16}. 16}. remedy remedy the the problem. problem.

dashboard, dashboard, the the pressure pressure plates plates may may be be bent bent slightly slightly to to according according to to details details described described in in the the

* * 1 1 If If the the

installed installed mounting mounting sleeve sleeve is is loose loose in in the the

2 2

Connect Connect all all other other leads leads of of the the unit unit

(Included) (Included)

Face Face Plate* Original Original Mounting Mounting Bracket Bracket

2 2

Plates*

1 1

Pressure Pressure

Ground Ground Lead* Lead*

the the unit unit using using the the supplied supplied screws. screws.

Dashboard Dashboard

1 1

Mount Mount (Included) (Included) the the original original mounting mounting bracket bracket to to

Mounting Mounting Sleeve Sleeve

secure secure it. it. Mounting Mounting Bracket Bracket

Slide Slide the the unit unit into into the the mounting mounting sleeve sleeve and and • • Installation Installation example example using using the the Original Original Connection Diagram of SPST Switch (sold separately)

(If the ACC power supply is not available)

ACC ~ I------'I 1 INE-W960 ~ (Red) ( SPST SW (Optional) : (Optional) INE-NAV-60 -<=J -- ~... ~· ---.....o~"o---- ... -F-IU=SE:J.(..... SA) INE-W960S BATTERY .. ----- ~ ------~---.....s:~l'iJDt"------oC:l...... (Yellow) FUSE (20A) (Optional)

• If your vehicle has no ACC power supply, add an SPST (Single-Pole, Single- Throw) switch (sold separately) and fuse (sold separately). • The diagram and the fuse amperage shown above are in the case when INE- W960/INE-NAV-60/INE- W960S is used individually. • If the switched power (ignition) lead of theINE-W960/INE-NAV-60/INE- W960S is connected directly to the positive ( +) post of the vehicle's battery, theINE-W960/INE-NAV-60/INE- W960S draws some current (several hundred milliamperes) even when its switch is placed in the OFF position, and the battery may be discharged.

15-EN Owner's manual Connections Connections

Connections 1/2

------++_,0 GPS Antenna 6 (Included) ~

iPod/iPhone with a iPod/iPhone with a 30-pin connector Lightning connector (Sold separately) (Sold separately)

~<:::JC::;)~ [J~\]I)~Q £::50<:::\ ~

00 Connection kit 1Pod VIDEO AV extens1on cable I ~ KCU-46liV

I ~:: : --- ~}::===:::!J USB extension cable ~ Lightning to USB Cable KCU-471i (Included) : (Sold separately) :__ m:I ) USB Memory (Sold separately)

REMO -- To amplifier or equalizer (Blue/White)

REVERSE -- To plus side of the back lamp signal lead of the car (Orange/White)

P.ANT --G To power antenna (Blue)

PARKING BRAKE To the parking brake signal lead (Yellow/Blue)

ACC (IGNITION) (Red) Ignition key

BATT (BATTERY) (Yellow)

GND -~ __..J $ (Black) mJ e Battery

(Green) Rear left (Green/Black) e~Qj (White) Front left (White/Black) e~Qj Speakers (Gray/Black) Front right (Gray) ~Qj® (Violet/Black) Rear right (Violet) ~Qj® 16-EN Connections 2/2

To SiriusXM Tuner (INE-W960/INE-NAV-60 only)

v-----~--~ Microphone (Included)

D b;d ? 0.------

L To steering remote control interface box

CAMERA - To Camera with RCA Output terminal (Yellow)

REMOTE OUT - To remote input lead (Brown)

AUXOUTPUT - To Rear Monitor Input terminal (Yellow)

Rear Left Amplifier ::r-----c: Rear Right

Front Left Amplifier ::r-----c: Front Right

::r-----c: Amplifier Subwoofers

17-EN

18-EN 18-EN

Audio Audio S/N S/N ratio ratio 100 100 dB dB

Video Video S/N S/N ratio ratio DVD : : 60 60 dB dB

Video Video output output level level 1 1 Vp-p Vp-p (75 (75 ohms) ohms)

Horizontal Horizontal resolution resolution 500 500 lines lines or or greater greater

Signal Signal system system NTSC/PAL NTSC/PAL

Channel Channel Separation Separation 85 85 dB dB (at (at 1 1 kHz) kHz)

or or

ON ON OFF. OFF. Dynamic Dynamic Range Range 95 95 dB dB (at (at 1 1 kHz) kHz)

possibility possibility that that of of the the pixels pixels could could 0. 0. be be 01% 01% either either always always Total Total Harmonic Harmonic Distortion Distortion 0.008% 0.008% (at (at 1 1 kHz) kHz)

pixel pixel ratio ratio is is over over 99.99%. 99.99%. This This means means that that there there is is Wow Wow a a & & Flutter(% Flutter(% WRMS) WRMS) Below Below measurable measurable limits limits

high high precision precision Frequency Frequency manufacturing manufacturing Response Response technology. technology. Its Its effective effective 5 5 - 20,000 20,000 Hz Hz (± (± 1 1 dB) dB)

• • The The LCD LCD panel panel is is manufactured manufactured using using an an extremely extremely CD/DVD CD/DVD SECTION SECTION

and and design design are are subject subject to to change change without without notice. notice.

• •

Due Due to to continuous continuous

product product improvement, improvement, specifications specifications software/bit software/bit rate. rate.

* * Frequency Frequency response response may may

differ differ depending depending on on the the encoder encoder

Depth Depth 11.5 11.5 mm mm (15/32") (15/32")

Channel Channel Separation Separation

85 85 dB dB (at (at 1 1 kHz) kHz) Height Height 96 96 mm mm (3-7 (3-7 /8") /8")

Signal-to-Noise Signal-to-Noise

Ratio Ratio

100 100 dB dB Width Width 171 171 mm mm (6-3/4") (6-3/4")

Dynamic Dynamic Range Range

95 95 dB dB (at (at 1 1 kHz) kHz)

NOSE NOSE SIZE SIZE

Total Total Harmonic Harmonic Distortion Distortion 0.008% 0.008% (at (at 1 1 kHz) kHz)

Frequency Frequency Response* Response* 5-20,000 5-20,000 Hz(± Hz(± 1 1 dB) dB)

Depth Depth 165 165 mm mm (6-1 (6-1 /2") /2")

Number Number of of Channels Channels 2-Channel 2-Channel (Stereo) (Stereo)

Height Height 100 100 mm mm (4") (4")

AAC AAC Decoding Decoding AAC-LC AAC-LC format".m4a"file format".m4a"file

Width Width 178 178 mm mm (7-1/8") (7-1/8")

WMA WMA Decoding Decoding Windows Windows MediaTM MediaTM Audio Audio

CHASSIS CHASSIS SIZE SIZE MP3 MP3 Decoding Decoding MPEG-1/2 MPEG-1/2 AUDIO AUDIO Layer-3 Layer-3

File File System System FAT16/32 FAT16/32

USB USB (Mass (Mass Storage Storage Class) Class) Preout Preout (Subwoofer): (Subwoofer): 4 4 V/lOK V/lOK ohms ohms (max.) (max.)

USB USB Class Class USB USB (Play (Play From From Device)/ Device)/ Preout Preout (Front, (Front, Rear): Rear): 4 4 V/1 V/1 OK OK ohms ohms (max.) (max.)

Max. Max. Power Power Consumption Consumption 1,000 1,000 mA mA Audio Audio output output level level

USB USB requirements requirements USB USB 1.1/2.0 1.1/2.0 Weight Weight 2.12 2.12 kg kg (41bs. (41bs. 11 11 oz) oz)

(-4oF (-4oF to+ to+ 140°F) 140°F) USB USB SECTION SECTION

Operating Operating temperature temperature - 20°C 20°C to to + + 60°C 60°C

(11-16 (11-16 V V allowable) allowable)

Usable Usable Sensitivity Sensitivity 22.5 22.5 ~V/27 ~V/27 dBf dBf

Power Power Requirement Requirement 14.4 14.4 V V DC DC

Tuning Tuning Range Range 530-1,710kHz 530-1,710kHz

GENERAL GENERAL

AM AM TUNER TUNER SECTION SECTION

Control Control Profile) Profile)

Capture Capture Ratio Ratio 2.0 2.0 dB dB

AVRCP AVRCP (AudioNideo (AudioNideo Remote Remote

Stereo Stereo Separation Separation 35 35 dB dB

Distribution Distribution Profile) Profile)

Signal-to-Noise Signal-to-Noise Ratio Ratio 65 65 dB dB

A2DP A2DP (Advanced (Advanced Audio Audio

Alternate Alternate Channel Channel Selectivity Selectivity 80 80 dB dB

PBAP PBAP (Phone (Phone Book Book Access Access Profile) Profile)

50 50 dB dB Quieting Quieting Sensitivity Sensitivity 13.5 13.5 dBf dBf (1.3 (1.3 ~V/75 ~V/75 ohms) ohms)

OPP OPP (Object (Object Push Push Profile) Profile)

Mono Mono Usable Usable Sensitivity Sensitivity 9.3 9.3 dBf dBf (0.8 (0.8 I.N/75 I.N/75 ohms) ohms)

Profile Profile HFP HFP (Hands-Free (Hands-Free Profile) Profile)

Tuning Tuning Range Range 87.7- 107.9 107.9 MHz MHz

Output Output Power Power +4 +4 dBm dBm Max . . (Power (Power class class

2) 2)

FM FM TUNER TUNER SECTION SECTION

BLUETOOTH BLUETOOTH Specification Specification Bluetooth Bluetooth V2.1 V2.1 +EDR +EDR

BLUETOOTH BLUETOOTH SECTION SECTION

Illumination Illumination System System LED LED

99% 99% or or more more

GPS GPS Reception Reception sensitivity sensitivity -130 -130 dB dB max. max.

Effective Effective Number Number of of Picture Picture Elements Elements

GPS GPS Reception Reception frequency frequency

1575.42 1575.42 ±1 ±1

MHz MHz

(800 (800 3 3 480) 480) X X X X

GPSSECTION GPSSECTION 1,152,000 1,152,000 pes . .

Number Number of of Picture Picture Elements Elements

Operation Operation System System TFT TFT active active matrix matrix Laser Laser power power CLASS CLASS II II

LCD LCD Type Type Transparent Transparent type type TN TN LCD LCD CD: CD: 785 785 nm nm

Screen Screen Size Size 6.1" 6.1" Wave Wave length length DVD: DVD: 666 666 nm nm

MONITOR MONITOR SECTION SECTION PICKUP PICKUP

Specifications Specifications

rpahual rpahual Owner's Owner's Specifications Specifications • This item incorporates copy protection technology • "MPEG Layer-3 audio coding technology licensed from that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual Fraunhofer liS and Thomson:' property rights of Rovi Corporation. Reverse • "Supply of this product only conveys a license for engineering and disassembly are prohibited. private,non-commercial use and does not convey • Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. a license nor imply any right to use this product in Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of any commercial (i.e. revenue-generation) real time Dolby Laboratories. broadcasting (terrestrial, satellite, cable and/or any • Windows Media, and the Windows logo are trademarks, other media), broadcasting/streaming via internet, I or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in intra nets and/or other networks or in other electronic the United States and/or other countries. content distribution systems, such as pay-audio or audio-on-demand applications. An independent • iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano, iPod touch, and license for such use is required. For details, please visit iTunes are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the http://www.mp31 icensing.com" U.S. and other countries. • Portions ©2014, Microsoft Corporation. All Rights • "Made for iPod;' and "Made for iPhone;' mean that an Reserved. electronic accessory has been designed to connect specifically to iPod, or iPhone, respectively, and • Android is a trademark of Google Inc. has been certified by the developer to meet Apple • ©1987-2014 HERE. All rights reserved. performance standards. Apple is not responsible for the • ~is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo Licensing operation of this device or its compliance with safety Corporation. and regulatory standards. Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod, or iPhone may affect wireless performance. • Pandora, the Pandora logo, and the Pandora trade dress are trademarks or registered trademarks of Pandora Media, Inc., used with permission. Pandora is currently available exclusively in the United States. This device will control Pandora when connected to a compatible iPhone that has access to the internet and the latest version of the Pandora® application installed. (Search for"Pandora" in the Apple iTunes App Store to find and install the most current version.) • SIRIUS, XM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of SIRIUS XM Radio Inc. and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. • This device will control Pandora when connected to a compatible Android™ or BlackBerry® phone that has Bluetooth, access to the internet, and the latest version of the Pandora® application installed. • BlackBerry®, RIM®, Research In Motion®, Sure Type® and related trademarks, names and logos are the property of Research In Motion Limited and are registered and/or used in the U.S. and countries around the world. Used under license from Research In Motion Limited. • DivX®, DivX Certified® and associated logos are trademarks of Rovi Corporation or its subsidiaries and are used under license. • The BLUETOOTH® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Alpine Electronics, Inc. is under license. • The terms HDMI and HDMI High-Definition Multimedia Interface, and the HDMI Logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing, LLC in the United States and other countries.

19-EN

e e aplicados. aplicados. tecnicos tecnicos requisitos requisitos aos aos atende atende 242/2000 242/2000 Resoluc;ao Resoluc;ao pela pela regulamentados regulamentados

procedimentos procedimentos os os com com acordo acordo de de ANATEL ANATEL pela pela homologado homologado esta esta equipamento equipamento Este Este

primario. primario. carater carater em em operando operando sistemas sistemas a a interferencia interferencia causar causar

e e pode pode nao nao tipo, tipo, mesmo mesmo do do estac;oes estac;oes de de mesmo mesmo prejudicial, prejudicial, interferencia interferencia contra contra

protec;ao protec;ao a a direito direito tem tem nao nao e, e, isto isto secundario, secundario, carater carater em em opera opera equipamento equipamento Este Este Brasil Brasil

deseado). deseado). no no funcionamiento funcionamiento

un un causar causar puede puede (que (que equipo equipo del del deseada deseada no no operaci6n operaci6n porIa porIa causada causada ser ser

puede puede que que interferencia interferencia incluyendo incluyendo recibida, recibida, interferencia interferencia cualquier cualquier aceptar aceptar

debe debe dispositivo dispositivo este este (2) (2) perjudicial, perjudicial, interferencia interferencia causar causar puede puede no no dispositivo dispositivo

Este Este (1) (1) condiciones: condiciones: dos dos siguientes siguientes las las a a sujeta sujeta esta esta equipo equipo este este de de operaci6n operaci6n La La Mexico Mexico

chevilles). chevilles). et et pieds pieds poignets, poignets, mains, mains,

(a (a extremites: extremites: des des !'exception !'exception corps corps le le et et rayonnant rayonnant dispositif dispositif le le entre entre plus plus ou ou em em 20 20

de de distance distance une une gardant gardant en en utilise utilise et et installe installe etre etre doit doit equipement equipement cet cet Cependant, Cependant,

autorisee. autorisee. maximale maximale !'exposition !'exposition

de de evaluation evaluation sans sans conforme conforme consideree consideree est est qui qui faible faible tres tres RF RF energie energie une une emet emet

equipement equipement Cet Cet I'IC. I'IC. de de 02 02 CNR-1 CNR-1 (RF) (RF) radioelectriques radioelectriques frequences frequences aux aux d'exposition d'exposition

a a et et OET65 OET65 C C Supplement Supplement le le dans dans d'exposition d'exposition directrices directrices ignes ignes I I FCC FCC Ia Ia de de (RF) (RF)

radioelectriques radioelectriques les les regles regles les les respecte respecte et et contr61e contr61e non non environnement environnement un un pour pour

enoncees enoncees rayonnements rayonnements aux aux d'exposition d'exposition limites limites aux aux conforme conforme est est equipement equipement Cet Cet

ankles). ankles). and and feet feet wrists, wrists, hands, hands, extremities: extremities: (excluding (excluding body body person's person's from from away away

more more or or em em 20 20 least least at at radiator radiator the the keeping keeping operated operated and and installed installed be be should should it it that that

desirable desirable is is it it But But (MPE). (MPE). evaluation evaluation exposure exposure permissive permissive maximum maximum without without comply comply

to to deemed deemed it it that that energy energy RF RF of of levels levels low low very very has has equipment equipment This This rules. rules. Exposure Exposure

(RF) (RF) frequency frequency radio radio IC IC the the of of 02 02 RSS-1 RSS-1 and and OET65 OET65 to to C C Supplement Supplement in in Guidelines Guidelines

Exposure Exposure (RF) (RF) frequency frequency radio radio FCC FCC the the meets meets and and environment environment uncontrolled uncontrolled

an an for for forth forth set set limits limits exposure exposure radiation radiation FCC/IC FCC/IC with with complies complies equipment equipment This This

equipment. equipment. the the operate operate to to authority authority user's user's the the void void could could compliance compliance

for for responsible responsible party party the the by by approved approved expressly expressly not not modifications modifications or or Changes Changes

WARNING WARNING FCC FCC USA/Canada USA/Canada

Regulation Regulation Radiation Radiation Electromagnetic Electromagnetic Bluetooth Bluetooth of of Rules Rules the the About About

service. service. de de centre centre un un recherchez recherchez vous vous si si Web Web site site notre notre visitez visitez ou ou gratuit gratuit numero numero notre notre Appelez Appelez

adresses. adresses. aces aces produit produit aucun aucun N'envoyez N'envoyez

U.S.A. U.S.A. 90501, 90501, California California Torrance, Torrance, Place, Place, Gramercy Gramercy 19145 19145 INC., INC., L'AMERIQUE, L'AMERIQUE, DE DE ELECTRONIQUE ELECTRONIQUE ALPINE ALPINE

Alpine. Alpine. incombe incombe produit produit

du du reexpedition reexpedition de de frais frais des des paiement paiement le le Alpine, Alpine, a a ou ou Alpine Alpine

service service de de centre centre un un a a envoye envoye ete ete a a produit produit le le si si et et garantie garantie Ia Ia

par par couvertes couvertes sont sont reparations reparations les les Si Si vous. vous. pour pour frais frais sans sans tout tout

le le revise, revise, ou ou neuf neuf produit produit un un par par placer placer rem rem le le ou ou produit produit le le

reparer reparer entre entre choix choix le le a a Alpine Alpine transport. transport. de de frais frais les les assumer assumer

en en et et

meme meme Alpine Alpine a a

ou ou

Alpine Alpine

autorise autorise

service service de de centre centre un un http://www.alpine-usa.com http://www.alpine-usa.com l'adresse l'adresse a a Web Web site site notre notre visitez visitez Ou Ou

CD CD

a a reparations reparations des des necessitant necessitant produit produit le le remettre remettre faut faut vous vous II II

(1-888-628-4357) (1-888-628-4357) e e 1-888-NAV-HELP 1-888-NAV-HELP NAVIGATION NAVIGATION GARANTIE GARANTIE LA LA DE DE PREVALOIR PREVALOIR SE SE COMMENT COMMENT

(1-800-257-4631) (1-800-257-4631) 1-800-ALPINE-1 1-800-ALPINE-1 VOITURE VOITURE DE DE AUDIO AUDIO

autorise; autorise; Alpine Alpine concessionnaire concessionnaire

d'un d'un l'entremise l'entremise par par @ @ achetes achetes ete ete pas pas proche. proche. n'ont n'ont qui qui produits produits Les Les

plus plus le le Alpine Alpine autorise autorise service service de de centre centre le le pour pour ci-dessous ci-dessous numeros numeros Canada; Canada; au au ou ou Rico Rico Porto Porto a a

aux aux Alpine Alpine appeler appeler veuillez veuillez services, services, nos nos de de besoin besoin @ @ avez avez Etats-Unis, Etats-Unis, aux aux vous vous Si Si Alpine Alpine par par distribues distribues pas pas sont sont ne ne qui qui produits produits Les Les

e e A A CLIENTELE CLIENTELE LA LA SERVICE SERVICE DU DU D'APPEL D'APPEL NUMEROS NUMEROS d'Aipine; d'Aipine; consentement consentement

® ® le le sans sans modifies modifies ou ou adaptes adaptes ete ete ont ont qui qui produits produits Les Les

garantie. garantie. Ia Ia sur sur cachet cachet son son appose appose ensuite ensuite it it a a qu'il qu'il et et retire; retire;

vehicule vehicule votre votre dans dans l'auto l'auto pour pour audio audio systeme systeme le le installe installe @ @ ou ou it it a a modifie modifie autorise autorise efface, efface, ete ete a a serie serie de de numero numero le le dont dont produits produits Les Les

d'installation d'installation centre centre qu'un qu'un faut faut il il valable, valable, soit soit garantie garantie Ia Ia que que Pour Pour autorisee; autorisee;

e e ® ® SEULEMENT SEULEMENT CANADA CANADA AU AU APPLICABLE APPLICABLE CLAUSE CLAUSE non non morale morale ou ou physique physique personne, personne, une une par par us us rend rend services services Les Les

produit; produit; du du reinstallation reinstallation

Ia Ia vous. vous. a a a a ou ou s'appliquer s'appliquer pas pas l'enlevement l'enlevement a a ne ne relatifs relatifs peuvent peuvent depenses depenses les les ou ou frais frais Les Les

garantie garantie Ia Ia de de exclusions exclusions les les et et limites limites les les cas, cas, ce ce Dans Dans indirects. indirects. ou ou naturels; naturels; cataclysmes cataclysmes autres autres aux aux

accessoires accessoires dommages dommages les les d'exclure d'exclure ou ou tacites tacites ou ou garanties garanties des des tempetes tempetes aux aux duree duree Ia Ia inondations, inondations, aux aux feu, feu, au au terre, terre, de de tremblements tremblements

limiter limiter de de interdisent interdisent provinces provinces aux aux certaines certaines et et etats etats notamment notamment @ @ certains certains majeure, majeure, outre, outre, force force Ia Ia En En a a dus dus dommages dommages Les Les

l'autre. l'autre. a a province province d'une d'une ou ou etat etat d'un d'un varient varient qui qui droits, droits, l'utilisateur. l'utilisateur. d'autres d'autres de de jouir jouir manuel manuel le le dans dans indiquees indiquees

aussi aussi pouvez pouvez vous vous mais mais specifiques, specifiques, droits droits des des donne donne vous vous garantie garantie instructions instructions La La des des non-respect non-respect le le par par ou ou utilisation utilisation mauvaise mauvaise

e e LOI LOI LA LA ET ET GARANTIE GARANTIE LA LA ENTRE ENTRE LIEN LIEN @ @ inapproprie, inapproprie, usage usage negligence, negligence, par par provoque provoque degat degat Tout Tout

chute. chute.

RECOURS. RECOURS. DE DE une une subi subi FORME FORME ayant ayant AUTRE AUTRE ou ou endommages endommages durs durs REMPLACENTTOUTE REMPLACENTTOUTE disques disques endommages, endommages,

ET ET EXCLUENT EXCLUENT ou ou PRESENTES PRESENTES fissures fissures LES LES LCD LCD PAR PAR panneaux panneaux PREVUS PREVUS fentes), fentes), RECOURS RECOURS ou ou LES LES dechirures dechirures (perforations, (perforations,

enceintes enceintes PRODUIT. PRODUIT. des des DU DU mecanique mecanique FONCTIONNEMENT FONCTIONNEMENT defaillance defaillance une une d'ecretage), d'ecretage), ou ou

MAUVAIS MAUVAIS AU AU SUITE SUITE ENDOMMAGES ENDOMMAGES BIENS BIENS D'AUTRES D'AUTRES REMPLACEMENT REMPLACEMENT distorsion distorsion de de effet effet un un atteindre atteindre jusqu'a jusqu'a l'amplificateur l'amplificateur de de

DE DE OU OU REPARATION REPARATION DE DE FRAIS FRAIS LES LES SONT SONT DIRECTS DIRECTS IN IN niveau niveau DOMMAGES DOMMAGES du du LES LES (augmentation (augmentation enceintes enceintes des des surexcitation surexcitation une une a a

A A PRODUIT. PRODUIT. DU DU GARDE GARDE suite suite LA LA grillees grillees LIES LIES FRAIS FRAIS acoustiques acoustiques AUTRE$ AUTRE$ LES LES bobines bobines TOUS TOUS des des compris compris y y utilisation, utilisation,

® ® ET ET VOITURES VOITURES DE DE LOCATION LOCATION LA LA D'AUTOBUS, D'AUTOBUS, mauvaise mauvaise une une BILLETS BILLETS ou ou LES LES accident accident un un PRODUIT, PRODUIT, par par DU DU provoques provoques degats degats Les Les

D'UTILISATION D'UTILISATION PERTE PERTE LA LA ORIGINAL, ORIGINAL, L'ACHETEUR L'ACHETEUR DE DE TEMPS TEMPS DE DE PERTE PERTE transporteur); transporteur); au au adressees adressees

LA LA ALPINE, ALPINE, SERVICE SERVICE DE DE etre etre CENTRE CENTRE doivent doivent UN UN reclamations reclamations PRODUITVERS PRODUITVERS (les (les DU DU repares repares etre etre TRANSPORT TRANSPORT pour pour Alpine Alpine a a renvoyes renvoyes

CD CD DE DE FRAIS FRAIS LES LES DOMMAGES-INTER~TS DOMMAGES-INTER~TS SONT SONT produits produits des des LES LES transport transport le le PRODUIT. PRODUIT. LE LE durant durant PAR PAR survenus survenus dommages dommages Les Les

PROVOQUES PROVOQUES INDIRECT$ INDIRECT$ DOMMAGES-INTER~TS DOMMAGES-INTER~TS DOMMAGES DOMMAGES ET ET DES DES suit: suit: qui qui ce ce pas pas couvre couvre ne ne garantie garantie Cette Cette

e e RESPONSABLE RESPONSABLE PAS PAS N'EST N'EST QU'ELLE QU'ELLE COUVERT COUVERT PAS PAS EXPRESSEMENT EXPRESSEMENT N'EST N'EST QUI QUI STIPULE STIPULE CE CE ALPINE ALPINE

e e GARANTIE GARANTIE LA LA DE DE EXCLUSIONS EXCLUSIONS

produit. produit. du du d'reuvre) d'reuvre) main main et et (pieces (pieces

fabrication fabrication de de PRODUIT. PRODUIT. et et D'UN D'UN materiaux materiaux VENTE VENTE de de LA LA DE DE defauts defauts VERTU VERTU les les tous tous couvre couvre garantie garantie Cette Cette

e e A A EN EN D'ALPINE D'ALPINE RESPONSABILITE RESPONSABILITE LA LA AUTREMENT AUTREMENT ENGAGER ENGAGER AUTORISE AUTORISE COUVERT COUVERT EST EST QUI QUI CE CE

N'EST N'EST PERSONNE PERSONNE CI-DESSUS. CI-DESSUS. DETERMINEE DETERMINEE EXPRESSE EXPRESSE GARANTIE GARANTIE

A A LA LA DE DE CELLE CELLE LIMITEE LIMITEE EST EST MARCHANDE, MARCHANDE, ET ET LOYALE LOYALE QUALITE QUALITE garantie. garantie. Ia Ia de de prevaloir prevaloir se se peut peut Canada, Canada, au au ou ou Rico Rico

A A DE DE GARANTIE GARANTIE LA LA ET ET Porto Porto a a L'UTILISATION L'UTILISATION Etats-Unis, Etats-Unis, aux aux D'ADAPTATION D'ADAPTATION resisde resisde s'il s'il GARANTIE GARANTIE produit, produit, du du original original Seull'acheteur Seull'acheteur

e e GARANTIE GARANTIE LA LA PAR PAR LA LA COMPRIS COMPRIS Y Y PROTEGEES PROTEGEES TACITE$, TACITE$, PERSONNES PERSONNES GARANTIES GARANTIES LES LES TOUTES TOUTES DE DE DUREE DUREE LA LA

e e TACITES TACITES GARANTIES GARANTIES DES DES LIMITATION LIMITATION

client. client. du du achat achat premier premier

du du date date Ia Ia de de partir partir a a an an envois. envois. un un des des suivi suivi pendant pendant vigueur vigueur en en est est garantie garantie Cette Cette

e e de de service service un un propose propose qui qui transporteur transporteur un un GARANTIE GARANTIE choisir choisir LA LA de de DE DE conseille conseille DUREE DUREE est est

il il l'envoi, l'envoi, de de perte perte Ia Ia eviter eviter Pour Pour transport. transport. son son durant durant dommage dommage

tout tout @ @ eviter eviter pour pour produit produit le le soigneusement soigneusement emballer emballer devez devez Vous Vous achetes. achetes. ete ete ont ont ils ils ou ou

@ @ produit. produit. du du achat achat votre votre de de preuve preuve Ia Ia joindre joindre pays pays le le devez devez dans dans Vous Vous que que produits produits les les couvre couvre »).Ellene »).Ellene produit produit le le (« (« connexes connexes

reparation. reparation. de de accessoires accessoires demande demande les les et et votre votre de de voiture voiture de de l'origine l'origine a a audio audio sont sont produits produits les les couvre couvre garantie garantie Cette Cette

e e ® ® qui qui problemes problemes des des GARANTIE GARANTIE detaillee detaillee LA LA PAR PAR description description une une COUVERTS COUVERTS donner donner devez devez PRODUITS PRODUITS Vous Vous

ci-dessous. ci-dessous. listes listes numeros numeros aux aux Alpine Alpine directement directement appeler appeler ou ou concessionnaires concessionnaires

nos nos de de l'un l'un contacter contacter veuillez veuillez question, question, moindre moindre Ia Ia avez avez vous vous Si Si entier. entier. en en et et attentivement attentivement lire lire dele dele suggerons suggerons vous vous Nous Nous garantie. garantie. cette cette offrir offrir

vous vous de de heureuse heureuse est est Alpine») Alpine») INC.(« INC.(« L'AMERIQUE, L'AMERIQUE, DE DE ELECTRONIQUE ELECTRONIQUE ALPINE ALPINE lite, lite, qua qua de de produits produits des des que que fournir fournir ne ne de de engagement engagement son son a a Fidele Fidele

LIMITEE LIMITEE GARANTIE GARANTIE

® ® ##MLPINE #/7//ILPINE. LIMITED WARRANTY

ALPINE ELECTRONICS OF AMERICA, INC. ("Alpine"), is dedicated to quality craftsmanship and are pleased to offer this Warranty. We suggest that you read it thoroughly. Should you have any questions, please contact your Dealer or contact Alpine at one of the telephone numbers listed below. e PRODUCTS COVERED: e HOW WE LIMIT IMPLIED WARRANTIES: This Warranty covers Car Audio Products and Related Accessories ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING FITNESS FOR USE AND ("the product"). Products purchased in the Canada are covered only MERCHANTABILITY ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE PERIOD OF in the Canada. Products purchased in the U.S.A. are covered only in THE EXPRESS WARRANTY SET FORTH ABOVE AND NO PERSON IS the U.S.A. AUTHORIZED TO ASSUME FOR ALPINE ANY OTHER LIABILITY IN CONNECTION WITH THE SALE OF THE PRODUCT. e LENGTH OF WARRANTY: This Warranty is in effect for one year from the date of the first e HOW WE EXCLUDE CERTAIN DAMAGES: consumer purchase. ALPINE EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS LIABILITY FOR INCIDENTAL AND CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES CAUSED BY THE PRODUCT. THE TERM e WHO IS COVERED: "INCIDENTAL DAMAGES" REFERS TO EXPENSES OF TRANSPORTING This Warranty only covers the original purchaser of the product, who THE PRODUCTTOTHE ALPINE SERVICE CENTER, LOSS OF THE must reside in the United States, Puerto Rico or Canada. ORIGINAL PURCHASER'S TIME, LOSS OF THE USE OF THE PRODUCT, BUS FARES, CAR RENTALS OR OTHERS COSTS RELATING TO THE CARE e WHAT IS COVERED: AND CUSTODY OF THE PRODUCT. THE TERM "CONSEQUENTIAL This Warranty covers defects in materials or workmanship (parts and DAMAGES" REFERS TO THE COST OF REPAIRING OR REPLACING OTHER labor) in the product. PROPERTY WHICH IS DAMAGED WHEN THIS PRODUCT DOES NOT WORK PROPERLY. THE REMEDIES PROVIDED UNDER THIS WARRANTY e WHAT IS NOT COVERED: ARE EXCLUSIVE AND IN LIEU OF ALL OTHERS. This Warranty does not cover the following: CD Damage occurring during shipment of the product to Alpine for e HOW STATE/PROVINCIAL LAW RELATES TO THE repair (claims must be presented to the carrier). WARRANTY: ® Damage caused by accident or abuse, including burned voice This Warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have coils caused by over-driving the speaker (amplifier level is turned other rights which vary from state to state and province to province. up and driven into distortion or clipping). Speaker mechanical In addition, some states/provinces do not allow limitations on how failure (e.g. punctures, tears or rips). Cracked or damaged LCD long an implied warranty lasts, and some do not allow the exclusion panels. Dropped or damaged hard drives. or limitation of incidental or consequential damages. Accordingly, @ Damage caused by negligence, misuse, improper operation or limitations as to these matters contained herein may not apply to you. failure to follow instructions contained in the Owner's manual. @ Damage caused by act of God, including without limitation, e IN CANADA ONLY: earthquake, fire, flood, storms or other acts of nature. This Warranty is not valid unless your Alpine car audio product has Any cost or expense related to the removal or reinstallation of been installed in your vehicle by an Authorized Installation Center, the product. and this warranty stamped upon installation by the installation center. ® Service performed by an unauthorized person, company or association. e HOW TO CONTACT CUSTOMER SERVICE: ® Any product which has the serial number defaced, altered or Should the product require service, please call the following number removed. for your nearest Authorized Alpine Service Center. (j) Any product which has been adjusted, altered or modified without Alpine's consent. CAR AUDIO 1-800-ALPINE-1 (1-800-257-4631) @ Any product not distributed by Alpine within the United States, NAVIGATION 1-888-NAV-HELP (1-888-628-4357) Puerto Rico or Canada. ® Any product not purchased from an Authorized Alpine Dealer. Or visit our website at; http://www.alpine-usa.com e HOW TO OBTAIN WARRANTY SERVICE: CD You are responsible for delivery of the product to an Authorized Alpine Service Center or Alpine for repair and for payment of any initial shipping charges. Alpine will, at its option, repair or replace the product with a new or reconditioned product without charge. If the repairs are covered by the warranty, and if the product was shipped to an Authorized Alpine Service Center or Alpine, Alpine will pay the return shipping charges. ® You should provide a detailed description of the problem(s) for which service is required. @ You must supply proof of your purchase of the product. @ You must package the product securely to avoid damage during shipment. To prevent lost packages it is recommended to use a carrier that provides a tracking service.

ALPINE ELECTRONICS OF AMERICA, INC., 19145 Gramercy Place, Torrance, California 90501, U.S.A. Do not send products to these addresses. Call the toll free telephone number or visit the website to locate a service center.

0 0 M351463201 M351463201 Korea Korea Seoul, Seoul, Jung_gu, Jung_gu, Pil_dong, Pil_dong, 3Ga, 3Ga, 18-6, 18-6,

_AS) _AS) (Y (Y 68-33122Z71-A 68-33122Z71-A Co. Co. Hwa Hwa Moon Moon JElL JElL

Korea Korea in in Printed Printed

by by Japan Japan ALPINE ALPINE Designed Designed

premios. premios. excelentes excelentes a a optar optar podra podra y y Alpine Alpine sabre sabre noticias noticias especiales, especiales, promociones promociones producto, producto,

del del informacion informacion de de actualizaciones actualizaciones recibira recibira Asimismo, Asimismo, www.alpine-usa.com/registration. www.alpine-usa.com/registration. direcci6n direcci6n

Ia Ia en en posible posible antes antes lo lo producto producto su su registrando registrando adquisici6n adquisici6n su su proteja proteja que que recomendamos recomendamos Le Le

recompenses. recompenses. des des recevoir recevoir pourrez pourrez et et Alpine Alpine concernant concernant nouvelles nouvelles des des promotionnelles, promotionnelles,

a a offres offres des des produits, produits, de de informations informations des des sur sur jours jours mises mises des des outre outre en en recevrez recevrez Vous Vous registration. registration.

www.alpine-usa.com/ www.alpine-usa.com/ sur sur produit produit votre votre registrant registrant en en en en achat achat votre votre proteger proteger de de temps temps le le Prenez Prenez

prizes. prizes. win win to to eligible eligible be be may may and and news news

Alpine Alpine promotions, promotions, special special information, information, product product on on updated updated be be also also will will You You com/registration. com/registration.

www.alpine-usa. www.alpine-usa. at at now now product product your your registering registering by by purchase purchase your your protect protect to to moment moment a a Take Take

EUA. EUA.

nos nos legais legais residentes residentes para para somente somente Aberto Aberto EE.UU./ EE.UU./ en en mente mente legal legal residentes residentes ciudadanos ciudadanos para para Solo Solo Unis./ Unis./

Etats­ aux aux legalement legalement residant residant personnes personnes aux aux accessible accessible Uniquement Uniquement residents./ residents./ US. US. legal legal to to only only Open Open

945-283588 945-283588 Phone Phone

Spain Spain 133, 133, (Aiava)-APDO (Aiava)-APDO Vitoria Vitoria 01013 01013 640 640 42 42 089-32 089-32 Phone Phone

32 32 Pabell6n, Pabell6n, 36, 36, Gamarra Gamarra de de Portal Portal Germany Germany MUnchen, MUnchen, 80807 80807

S.A. S.A. ESPANA, ESPANA, DE DE ELECTRONICS ELECTRONICS ALPINE ALPINE 1-3, 1-3, Wilhelm-Wagenfeld-Str. Wilhelm-Wagenfeld-Str.

GmbH GmbH ELECTRONICS ELECTRONICS ALPINE ALPINE

484781 484781 02 02 +39 +39 Phone Phone

Italy Italy Ml, Ml, Naviglio Naviglio sui sui no no Trezza Trezza 20090 20090 03-8787-1200 03-8787-1200 Phone Phone

8 8 Colombo, Colombo, Cristofaro Cristofaro Viale Viale Australia Australia 3803, 3803, Victoria Victoria Hallam Hallam

S.p.A. S.p.A. ITALIA ITALIA ALPINE ALPINE Highway, Highway, Princes Princes 161-165 161-165

LTD. LTD. PTY. PTY. AUSTRALIA AUSTRALIA OF OF ELECTRONICS ELECTRONICS ALPINE ALPINE

89 89 89 89 63 63 48 48 33(0)1 33(0)1 Phone:+ Phone:+

FRANCE FRANCE (1-888-628-4357) (1-888-628-4357) 1-888-NAV-HELP 1-888-NAV-HELP

cedex cedex COG COG Roissy Roissy 945 945 95 95 (1-800-257-4631) (1-800-257-4631) 1-800-ALPINE-1 1-800-ALPINE-1 Phone Phone

Villepinte Villepinte 52016- CS CS U.S.A. U.S.A. 90501, 90501, California California

Erables Erables des des allee allee 184 184 Torrance, Torrance, Place, Place, Gramercy Gramercy 19145 19145

S.A.R.L. S.A.R.L. France France ELECTRONICS ELECTRONICS ALPINE ALPINE INC. INC. AMERICA, AMERICA, OF OF ELECTRONICS ELECTRONICS ALPINE ALPINE

www.alpine.co.uk www.alpine.co.uk 03-5499-4531 03-5499-4531 Phone: Phone:

U.K. U.K. 9TW, 9TW, CV4 CV4 Coventry Coventry JAPAN JAPAN 145-0067, 145-0067, Tokyo Tokyo

Highway, Highway, Fletchamstead Fletchamstead House House Alpine Alpine Ota-ku, Ota-ku, Yukigaya-Otsukamachi, Yukigaya-Otsukamachi, 1-7, 1-7,

LTD. LTD. U.K. U.K. OF OF ELECTRONICS ELECTRONICS ALPINE ALPINE INC. INC. MARKETING, MARKETING, ELECTRONICS ELECTRONICS ALPINE ALPINE R

EN IN-DASH GPS NAVIGATION RECEIVER

INE-W960HDMI FR INE-NAV-60HDMI INE-W960SHDMI ES

PT

• OWNER’S MANUAL • MANUAL DE OPERACIÓN Please read before using this equipment. Léalo antes de utilizar este equipo. • MODE D’EMPLOI • MANUAL DO PROPRIETÁRIO Veuillez lire avant d’utiliser cet appareil. Leia antes de usar este equipamento.

Open only to legal US. residents./ Uniquement accessible aux personnes résidant légalement aux États-Unis./ Solo para ciudadanos residentes legalmente en EE.UU./ Aberto somente para residentes legais nos EUA.

Thank you for purchasing this Alpine product. Please take a moment to protect your purchase by registering your product now at the following address: www.alpine-usa.com/registration. You will be informed of product and software updates (if applicable), special promotions, news about Alpine, and entered for a chance to win prizes.

Merci d’avoir acheté ce produit Alpine. Nous vous invitons à consacrer un moment à la protection de votre achat en enregistrant votre produit dès maintenant à l’adresse suivante : www.alpine-usa.com/registration. Vous serez tenu informé des mises à jour des produits et des logiciels (le cas échéant), des promotions spéciales, de l’actualité d’Alpine, et vous aurez une chance de remporter des prix.

Gracias por adquirir este producto Alpine. Con solo unos pocos pasos podrá proteger su producto, registrándolo a través de la siguiente dirección: www.alpine-usa.com/registration. Recibirá información sobre nuevos productos y software, promociones especiales, novedades sobre Alpine y participará en el sorteo de premios.

Designed by ALPINE Japan 68-33122Z70-A ALPINE ELECTRONICS MARKETING, INC. ALPINE ELECTRONICS OF AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD. ALPINE ITALIA S.p.A. 1-7, Yukigaya-Otsukamachi, Ota-ku, 161-165 Princes Highway, Hallam Viale Cristoforo Colombo, 8 Tokyo 145-0067, JAPAN Victoria 3803, Australia 20090 Trezzano sul Naviglio MI, Italy Phone: 03-5499-4531 Phone 03-8787-1200 Phone +39 02 484781

ALPINE ELECTRONICS OF AMERICA, INC. ALPINE ELECTRONICS GmbH ALPINE ELECTRONICS DE ESPAÑA, S.A. 19145 Gramercy Place, Torrance, Wilhelm-Wagenfeld-Str. 1-3, 80807 München, Portal de Gamarra 36, Pabellón, 32 California 90501, U.S.A. Germany 01013 Vitoria (Alava)-APDO 133, Spain Phone 1-800-ALPINE-1 (1-800-257-4631) Phone 089-32 42 640 Phone 945-283588

ALPINE ELECTRONICS France S.A.R.L. ALPINE ELECTRONICS OF U.K. LTD. 184 allée des Erables Alpine House CS 52016 - Villepinte Fletchamstead Highway, Coventry CV4 9TW, U.K. 95 945 Roissy CDG cedex www.alpine.co.uk FRANCE Phone : + 33(0)1 48 63 89 89 ENGLISH Contents PTY (Program Type) Tuning ...... 20 Displaying Radio Text ...... 20 Operating Instructions CD/MP3/WMA/AAC Playback ...... 21 PRECAUTIONS Repeat Play ...... 21 M.I.X. (Random Play) ...... 21 IMPORTANT INFORMATION ...... 7 M.I.X. ALL (Shuffle Songs) (Concerning MP3/WMA/AAC) ...... 21 WARNING Selecting Folders (Concerning MP3/WMA/AAC) ...... 22 Points to Observe for Safe Usage ...... 7 Searching from CD Text ...... 22 WARNING ...... 8 File/Folder Name Search CAUTION ...... 8 (Concerning MP3/WMA/AAC) ...... 22 NOTICE ...... 9 About MP3/WMA/AAC ...... 22 Discs Playable on This Unit ...... 10 DVD Getting Started Playing a Disc ...... 25 Accessory List ...... 14 If a Menu Screen Appears ...... 25 Numeric Keypad Input Operations ...... 26 Location of Controls ...... 14 Displaying the Top Menu Screen ...... 26 Turning Power On or Off ...... 14 Displaying the Menu Screen ...... 26 Turning the System On ...... 15 Stopping Playback (PRE STOP) ...... 26 Initial System Start-Up ...... 15 Stopping Playback ...... 26 Inserting/Ejecting a Disc ...... 15 Fast-forwarding/Fast-reversing ...... 26 Inserting the Disc ...... 15 Finding the Beginnings of Chapters/Tracks/ Removing the Disc ...... 15 Files ...... 26 Adjusting the Volume ...... 15 Playing Still Frames (Pausing) ...... 27 Lowering Volume Quickly ...... 15 Slow Motion Playback ...... 27 Top banner and Bottom banner Fade Out Selecting Folders ...... 27 Setting ...... 16 Repeat Playback ...... 27 Switching Sources ...... 16 Searching by Title Number ...... 27 Screen Off Function ...... 16 About Sound Menu button ...... 16 Searching Directly by Chapter Number ...... 28 Touch Operation ...... 17 Searching for a Desired Video File ...... 28 Selecting an Item in a List ...... 17 Switching the Angle ...... 28 About the Indicator Display ...... 17 Switching the Audio Tracks ...... 28 Displaying Audio/Visual Information on the Switching the Subtitles Navigation screen ...... 18 (Subtitle Language) ...... 28 About DivX® ...... 29 Radio/RBDS Listening to the Radio ...... 19 Presetting Stations Manually ...... 19 Presetting Stations Automatically ...... 19 Tuning to Preset Stations ...... 19

3-EN Setup Adjusting the Crossover Settings (X-Over) ...... 38 Setup Operation Adjusting the Parametric Equalizer Curve (Parametric EQ) ...... 38 General Setup Other Setting ...... 39 General Setup Operation ...... 30 Volume Setting ...... 39 Text Display Setting ...... 30 Setting the Volume for Each Source ...... 39 Setting the Scroll ...... 30 Rear Speaker Setting ...... 39 Format Settings ...... 31 Turning Subwoofer On/Off ...... 39 Setting the Menu Language ...... 31 Setting the Subwoofer Phase ...... 39 Clock Display Setting ...... 31 Setting Defeat ...... 39 Setting Top banner and Bottom banner About Time Correction ...... 40 Display ...... 31 About the Crossover ...... 41 Screen/LED Customize ...... 31 Source Setup Setting the Brightness of the Backlighting ...... 31 Source Setup Operation ...... 41 Adjusting the Minimum Level of Disc Setting ...... 42 Backlight ...... 31 Setting of the DVD Menu Language ...... 42 Adjusting the Dimmer of Button Lighting at Setting of the Audio Language ...... 42 Night ...... 32 Setting of the Subtitle Language ...... 42 Switching the Display Color and Wallpaper Changing the Language Setting ...... 42 Image (Background) ...... 32 Changing the Country Code Setting ...... 42 Visual Setting ...... 32 Setting the Rating Level (Parental Lock) .... 42 Switching Display Modes ...... 32 Setting the TV Screen Mode ...... 43 Adjusting Brightness ...... 33 Radio Setting ...... 43 Adjusting Color of Picture ...... 33 Setting the TUNER (FM) Tone Quality Adjusting Image Contrast ...... 33 (Tuner Condition) ...... 43 About INE-W960/INE-NAV-60/ AUX Setting ...... 44 INE-W960S ...... 33 Setting the AUX Mode ...... 44 Displaying the Product Information ...... 33 Setting the Primary AUX Name ® Checking the DivX Registration ...... 33 (AUX Setup) ...... 44 Initializing the System ...... 33 SiriusXM Setting Installation Setup ...... 34 (INE-W960/INE-NAV-60 only) ...... 44 Demonstration Setup ...... 34 Managing Artist, Song and Sports Team Setting Demo mode to Off/On ...... 34 Alerts ...... 44 Setting the Favorite Sports Team Alerts ...... 45 Sound Setup Setting the Parental Lock ...... 45 Sound Setup Operation ...... 34 Signal Strength Information ...... 46 Car Specific Sound Setup ...... 35 Setting the App connection method ...... 46 Setting the MX (Media Xpander) ...... 35 Rear Seat Entertainment Setting ...... 46 Equalizer Presets (EQ Presets) ...... 36 Setting the Rear Seat Entertainment System ...... 46 Quick Sound Setup ...... 36 Adjusting Bass Level/Treble Level ...... 36 BLUETOOTH Setup Adjusting the Subwoofer Level ...... 36 BLUETOOTH Setup Operation ...... 47 Setting the MX (Media Xpander) ...... 36 Setting the BASS ENGINE SQ ...... 36 Displaying BLUETOOTH Information ...... 47 Setting the BASS ENGINE Type ...... 37 Registering the BLUETOOTH Device ...... 47 Adjusting the BASS ENGINE Level ...... 37 Setting the Passcode ...... 48 Adjusting the Fader/Balance ...... 37 Selecting the Output Speaker ...... 48 Adjusting the Time Correction (TCR) ...... 37

4-EN Adjusting the Caller Volume ...... 48 BLUETOOTH Audio Adjusting the Microphone Level ...... 48 Playback ...... 57 Adjusting the Ring Tone Volume ...... 48 Repeat Play ...... 58 Deleting All the Histories ...... 48 M.I.X. (Random Play) ...... 58 Changing the Phone book List Order ...... 48 Search Function ...... 58 Camera Setup Auxiliary Device (Optional) Camera Setup Operation ...... 49 Operating Auxiliary Devices (Optional) ...... 59 AUX Camera Setting ...... 49 Operating an External DVD Player ...... 59 Setting the Camera Input ...... 49 Change to the External DVD Mode ...... 59 Camera Interrupt Setting About the DVD Operation Screen ...... 60 (Power OFF Mode) ...... 50 Operating an External DVD Changer ...... 60 About the Rear Camera Guide ...... 50 Change to the External DVD Changer BLUETOOTH Operation Mode ...... 60 About the DVD Changer Operation Setup Before Using ...... 52 Screen ...... 61 About BLUETOOTH ...... 52 Operating a TV ...... 61 About the Hands-Free Phone ...... 52 Change to the TV Mode ...... 61 Before Using BLUETOOTH ...... 52 About the TV Operation Screen ...... 61 Hands-Free Phone Control Applying TuneIt Connecting a BLUETOOTH Device ...... 52 Launching TuneIt App...... 62 Disconnecting the BLUETOOTH Facebook Notification Function ...... 62 Connection ...... 52 Changing the connecting BLUETOOTH Camera Operation (Optional) Device ...... 53 Rear Camera Operation ...... 63 Answering a Call ...... 53 Checking Rear Camera view ...... 63 Adjusting Ringtone Volume ...... 53 Displaying the Rear View Video while the Car Hanging up the Telephone ...... 53 is in Reverse ...... 63 Calling ...... 53 USB Memory (Optional) Using Short Cut Dialing to Make a Call ..... 53 Dialing a Number in Call History ...... 53 Playback ...... 64 Dialing a Number in the Phone Book ...... 54 Repeat Play ...... 65 Entering a Phone Number to Make a Call ... 54 Random Play (M.I.X.) ...... 65 Redial Function ...... 54 Random Play (Shuffle Songs) ...... 65 Voice Dial Function ...... 54 Searching for a Desired Song ...... 65 Operations During a Conversation ...... 55 Tag Search ...... 65 Adjusting the Speech Volume ...... 55 File/Folder Name Search ...... 66 Changing the Voice Output ...... 55 DTMF (Touch-Tone) Function ...... 55 Direct Up/Down Function ...... 66 Muting the Speech Volume ...... 55 Select the Desired Folder Phone Book Function ...... 55 (Folder up/down) ...... 66 Synchronizing the Phone Book ...... 55 iPod/iPhone (Optional) Adding the Phone Book ...... 55 Searching in the Phone Book ...... 56 Playback ...... 68 Deleting the Phone Book Entries ...... 56 Searching for a Music File ...... 68 Assigning as a Short Cut Dialing Number ..... 56 Searching for a Desired Video File ...... 69 Call Waiting Function ...... 57 Alphabet Skip Function ...... 69 Direct Up/Down Function ...... 69

5-EN Repeat Play ...... 70 Random Play (Shuffle) ...... 70 Installation and Random Play (Shuffle Songs) ...... 70 Connections ® Pandora internet radio (optional) Warning ...... 88 (INE-W960/INE-NAV-60 only) Caution ...... 88 Listening to Pandora® ...... 71 Precautions ...... 88 “Thumbs” Feedback ...... 71 Installation ...... 89 Searching for a Desired Station ...... 72 Connections ...... 92 Creating a New Station ...... 72 System Example ...... 94 QuickMix ...... 72 LIMITED WARRANTY Bookmarking a Desired Track or Artist ...... 72 How to Input Characters and Numbers (Keypad) ...... 73 SiriusXM Satellite Radio (Optional) (INE-W960/INE-NAV-60 only) Receiving Channels with the SiriusXM Tuner ...... 74 Tuning Channels by Category ...... 74 Changing the Display ...... 75 Checking the SiriusXM Radio ID Number .... 75 Storing Channel Presets ...... 75 Tuning Channels Using Presets ...... 75 Search Function ...... 75 Selecting the Channel Directly ...... 76 Storing the Desired Song/Artist ...... 76 Receiving and Tuning to an Alert ...... 76 Replay Function ...... 77 Parental Control Function ...... 77 Using Jump Memory and Jump Recall Function ...... 77 Information Product Software Update ...... 78 About DVDs ...... 78 List of Language Codes ...... 79 List of Country Codes ...... 80 In Case of Difficulty ...... 82 If this Message Appears ...... 83 Specifications ...... 85 END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT (Microsoft) ...... 86 END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT (HERE) ...... 87

6-EN Operating Instructions

If there is anything in the manual about the operation of the navigation system which you are uncertain about, PRECAUTIONS please contact your local Alpine authorized navigation dealer or Alpine at 1-888-NAV-HELP (1-888-628-4357) before using the navigation system.

IMPORTANT INFORMATION FCC COMPLIANCE STATEMENT This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE USING THIS limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC PRODUCT Rules. These limits are designed to provide more reasonable This product is intended to provide turn by turn instructions to protection against harmful interference in a residential get you to a desired destination. Please make certain that all installation, and are more stringent than “outdoor” requirements. persons using this navigation system carefully read these precautions and the following instructions fully. Operation is subjected to the following two conditions: (1) This • This product is not a substitute for your personal judgment. Any device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference route suggestions made by this navigation system may never that may cause undesired operation. supersede any local traffic regulations or your personal judgment and/or knowledge of safe driving practices. Do not follow route This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio suggestions if the navigation system instructs you to perform an frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance unsafe or illegal maneuver, places you in an unsafe situation, or with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio routes you into an area which you consider unsafe. communications. However, there is no guarantee that • Glance at the screen only when necessary and safe to do so. If interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this prolonged viewing of the screen is necessary, pull over in a safe equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television and legal manner and location. reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment • Do not input destinations, change settings, or access any off and on, you are encouraged to try to correct the interference functions requiring a prolonged view of the monitor and/or by one of the following measures: remote control while you are driving. Pull over in a safe and • Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. legal manner and location before attempting to access the • Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver. system. • Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from • Do not use the navigation system to route you to emergency that to which the receiver is connected. services. Not all locations of emergency services such as police • Consult an experienced radio/TV technician. and fire stations, hospitals and clinics are contained in the database. Please use your own judgment and ask for directions in these situations. • The map database used in the navigation system is the most WARNING recent map data available at the time of production. Because of changes in streets and neighborhoods, there may be situations where the navigation system is not able to route you to your desired destination. In these cases, use your own judgment. Points to Observe for Safe Usage • The map database is designed to provide you with route suggestions and does not take into account the relative safety of a • Read this manual carefully before using this disc and the system suggested route or of factors which may affect the time required components. They contain instructions on how to use this to reach your destination. The system does not reflect road product in a safe and effective manner. Alpine cannot be closures or construction, road characteristics (i.e. type of road responsible for problems resulting from failure to observe the surface, slope or grade, weight or height restrictions, etc.), traffic instructions in this manual. congestion, weather conditions, or any other factors which may • This manual uses various pictorial displays to show you how to affect the safety or timing of your driving experience. Use your use this product safely and to alert you to potential dangers own personal judgment if the navigation system is unable to resulting from improper connections and operation. Following provide you with an alternate route. are the meanings of these pictorial displays. It is important to • There may be situations where the navigation system displays fully understand the meanings of these pictorial displays in order the vehicle’s location erroneously. Use your own driving to use this manual and the system properly. judgment in this situation, taking into account current driving conditions. Please be aware that in this situation the navigation system should correct the vehicle’s position automatically. However, there may be times where you may have to correct the position yourself. If this is the case, pull over in a safe and legal manner and location before attempting operation. • Make certain that the volume level of the navigation system is set to a level which still allows you to hear outside traffic and emergency vehicles.

7-EN DO NOT DISASSEMBLE OR ALTER. WARNING Doing so may result in an accident, fire or electric shock.

• Operation of the system while driving is dangerous. Users USE ONLY IN CARS WITH A 12 VOLT NEGATIVE GROUND. should stop vehicle before operating the software. (Check with your dealer if you are not sure.) Failure to do so may • Road conditions and regulations take precedence over result in fire, etc. information contained on the map display: observe actual traffic restrictions and circumstances while driving. KEEP SMALL OBJECTS SUCH AS SCREWS OUT OF THE • This software is designed for use exclusively in the INE-W960/INE-NAV-60/INE-W960S. It cannot and may not be REACH OF CHILDREN. used in conjunction with other hardware. Swallowing them may result in serious injury. If swallowed, consult a physician immediately.

USE THE CORRECT AMPERE RATING WHEN REPLACING WARNING FUSES. This symbol means important instructions. Failure to do so may result in fire or electric shock. Failure to heed them can result in serious injury DO NOT BLOCK VENTS OR RADIATOR PANELS. or death. Doing so may cause heat to build up inside and may result in fire.

INSTALL THE PRODUCT CORRECTLY SO THAT THE DRIVER USE THIS PRODUCT FOR MOBILE 12V APPLICATIONS. CANNOT WATCH TV/VIDEO UNLESS THE VEHICLE IS Use for other than its designed application may result in fire, STOPPED AND THE EMERGENCY BRAKE IS APPLIED. electric shock or other injury. It is dangerous for the driver to watch TV/Video while driving a vehicle. Installing this product incorrectly enables the driver to DO NOT PLACE HANDS, FINGERS OR FOREIGN OBJECTS IN watch TV/Video while driving. This may cause a distraction, INSERTION SLOTS OR GAPS. preventing the driver from looking ahead, thus causing an accident. Doing so may result in personal injury or damage to the product. The driver or other people could be severely injured.

DO NOT WATCH VIDEO WHILE DRIVING. CAUTION Watching the video may distract the driver from looking ahead of the vehicle and cause an accident. This symbol means important instructions. Failure to heed them can result in injury or DO NOT OPERATE ANY FUNCTION THAT TAKES YOUR material property damage. ATTENTION AWAY FROM SAFELY DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE. Any function that requires your prolonged attention should only be HALT USE IMMEDIATELY IF A PROBLEM APPEARS. performed after coming to a complete stop. Always stop the vehicle in a safe location before performing these functions. Failure to do Failure to do so may cause personal injury or damage to the so may result in an accident. product. Return it to your authorized Alpine dealer or the nearest Alpine Service Center for repairing. DO NOT FOLLOW ROUTE SUGGESTIONS IF THE KEEP FINGERS AWAY WHILE THE MOTORIZED FRONT NAVIGATION SYSTEM INSTRUCTS YOU TO PERFORM AN PANEL OR MOVING MONITOR IS IN MOTION. UNSAFE OR ILLEGAL MANEUVER, OR PLACES YOU IN AN Failure to do so may result in personal injury or damage to the UNSAFE SITUATION OR AREA. product. This product is not a substitute for your personal judgment. Any route suggestions by this system should never supersede any local traffic regulations or your personal judgment or knowledge of safe driving practice.

KEEP THE VOLUME AT A LEVEL WHERE YOU CAN STILL HEAR OUTSIDE NOISES WHILE DRIVING. Excessive volume levels that obscure sounds such as emergency vehicle sirens or road warning signals (train crossings, etc.) can be dangerous and may result in an accident. LISTENING AT LOUD VOLUME LEVELS IN A CAR MAY ALSO CAUSE HEARING DAMAGE.

MINIMIZE DISPLAY VIEWING WHILE DRIVING. Viewing the display may distract the driver from looking ahead of the vehicle and cause an accident.

8-EN New Discs NOTICE To prevent the disc from jamming, “Disc error” is displayed if discs with irregular surfaces are inserted or if discs are inserted Product Cleaning incorrectly. When a new disc is ejected immediately after initial Use a soft dry cloth for periodic cleaning of the product. For more loading, use your finger to feel around the inside of the center hole severe stains, please dampen the cloth with water only. Anything and outside edge of the disc. If you feel any small bumps or else has the chance of dissolving the paint or damaging the plastic. irregularities, this could inhibit proper loading of the disc. To remove the bumps, rub the inside edge of the hole and outside edge Temperature of the disc with a ballpoint pen or other such instrument, then insert Be sure the temperature inside the vehicle is between +45°C the disc again. (+113°F) and 0°C (+32°F) before turning your unit on. Center Hole Center Hole New Disc Moisture Condensation You may notice the disc playback sound wavering due to Bumps Outside condensation. If this happens, remove the disc from the player and (Bumps) wait about an hour for the moisture to evaporate.

Damaged Disc Installation Location Do not attempt to play cracked, warped, or damaged discs. Playing Make sure the INE-W960/INE-NAV-60/INE-W960S will not be a bad disc could severely damage the playback mechanism. installed in a location subjected to: • Direct sun and heat Maintenance • High humidity and water If you have problems, do not attempt to repair the unit yourself. • Excessive dust Return it to your Alpine dealer or the nearest Alpine Service • Excessive vibrations Station for servicing. Correct Handling Never Attempt the Following Do not drop the disc while handling. Hold the disc so you will not Do not grip or pull out the disc while it is being pulled back into the leave fingerprints on the surface. Do not affix tape, paper, or player by the automatic reloading mechanism. gummed labels to the disc. Do not write on the disc. Do not attempt to insert a disc into the unit when the unit power is CORRECT off.

INCORRECT CORRECT

Inserting Discs Your player accepts only one disc at a time for playback. Do not attempt to load more than one disc. Make sure the label side is facing up when you insert the disc. Playing a disc while driving on a very bumpy road may result in skips, but this will not scratch the disc or damage the player. Disc Cleaning Fingerprints, dust, or soil on the surface of the disc could cause the Irregular Shaped Discs DVD player to skip. For routine cleaning, wipe the playing surface Be sure to use round shaped discs only for this unit and never use with a clean, soft cloth from the center of the disc to the outer edge. any special shaped discs. If the surface is heavily soiled, dampen a clean, soft cloth in a Use of special shaped discs may cause damage to the mechanism. solution of mild neutral detergent before cleaning the disc.

9-EN Disc Accessories Discs Playable on This Unit There are various accessories available on the market for protecting the disc surface and improving sound quality. However, most of Playable Discs them will influence the thickness and/or diameter of the disc. Using The discs listed below can be played on this unit. such accessories can cause operational problems. We recommend not using these accessories on discs played in Alpine DVD players. Recorded Mark (logo) Disc size Content

DVD Video Audio + Video 12 cm*

Transparent Sheet Disc Stabilizer

Operation of some of the functions of this unit is very complex. Because of this, it was deemed necessary to place these functions into a special screen. This will restrict operation of these functions Music CD Audio 12 cm to times when the vehicle is parked. This ensures the focus of the driver’s attention will be on the road and not on the INE-W960/ INE-NAV-60/INE-W960S. This has been done for the safety of the driver and passengers. Setup operations cannot be made if the car is moving. The car must be parked and the parking brake must be engaged for the procedure described in the Owner’s Manual to be valid. The warning “Unable DivX® Audio + Video 12 cm to operate while driving.” will be displayed if any attempts are made to perform these operations while driving. * Two-layer DVD disc compatible • The INE-W960/INE-NAV-60/INE-W960S draws minimal current The formatted discs listed below can be played on this unit. even when its power switch is turned off. If the switched power (ignition) lead of the INE-W960/INE-NAV-60/INE-W960S is connected directly to the positive (+) post of the vehicle’s battery, the CD-R/ DVD-R/ DVD+R/ battery may be discharged. CD-RW DVD-RW DVD+RW An SPST (Single-Pole, Single-Throw) switch (sold separately) can be added to simplify this procedure. Then, you can simply place it in the CD Format OFF position when you leave the vehicle. Turn the SPST switch back ON before using the INE-W960/INE-NAV-60/INE-W960S. For MP3 Format (“mp3”) connecting the SPST switch, refer to the “Connection Diagram of SPST Switch (sold separately)” (page 91). If the power (ignition) WMA Format (“wma”) lead is unswitched, it must be disconnected from the battery post should the vehicle be left unused for an extended period of time. AAC Format (“m4a”)

DVD Video Format

DivX Format (“avi,” “divx”)

• Discs that are not finalized cannot be played back.

10-EN Discs that cannot be played Tips for making your own discs DVD-ROMs, DVD-RAMs, CD-ROMs (excluding MP3/WMA/ The INE-W960/INE-NAV-60/INE-W960S plays DVD Video, AAC files), photo CDs, etc. DivX®, Audio CD and has a built in MP3/WMA/AAC decoder. The following information is designed to help you create your own DualDisc music CDs (either Audio CD or MP3/WMA/AAC encoded CD-R/ This unit is not compatible with DualDisc. RW files). Using a DualDisc may cause unit malfunction, and may cause disc What is the difference between an Audio and MP3/WMA/AAC damage when the disc is inserted/ejected. CD? An Audio CD is the same format as the commercial CDs you buy DVD region number (playable region number) in the store (also known as CD-DA). MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer 3)/ Region numbers supported by this unit are as follows. DVDs with a WMA (Windows Media Audio)/AAC (Advanced Audio Coding) is region number other than those listed below, cannot be played on a data file that uses a compression scheme to reduce the size of the this DVD player. music file*. Multisession CD-R/RW: INE-W960/INE-NAV-60 ALL Once a recording has been stopped, this is considered one session. If the disc is not closed (finalized), additional data may be added. Once this additional data has been recorded, this becomes a INE-W960S ALL “multisession” CD. * If the first session on a disc containing both CD-DA data and MP3/WMA/AAC data is a CD-DA file, only CD-DA files will Using compact discs (CD/CD-R/CD-RW) be played. If you use unspecified compact discs, correct performance cannot Properly formatted MP3/WMA/AAC Discs: be guaranteed. Use ISO9660 formatting to insure proper playback. You may use You can play CD-Rs (CD-Recordables)/CD-RWs (CD- standard ISO naming Level 1 (8.3 DOS standard), Level 2 ReWritables) which have been recorded only on audio devices. (32 characters) or Joliet (Windows or Macintosh long filenames) You can also play CD-Rs/CD-RWs containing MP3/WMA/AAC file naming conventions*. formatted audio files. * Please consult the Owner’s manual for additional information. • Some of the following discs may not play on this unit: Flawed discs, discs with fingerprints, discs exposed to extreme temperatures or sunlight (e.g., left in the car or this unit), discs On handling compact discs (CD/CD-R/CD-RW) recorded under unstable conditions, discs on which a recording • Do not touch the surface. failed or a re-recording was attempted, copy-protected CDs • Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight. which do not conform to the audio CD industry standard. • Do not affix stickers or labels. • Use discs with MP3/WMA/AAC files written in a format • Clean the disc when it is dusty. compliant with this unit. For details, see pages 22 and 23. • Make sure that the disc is smooth and flat. • Do not use commercially available disc accessories. To customers using CD-R/CD-RW • If a CD-R/CD-RW cannot be played back, make sure the last Do not leave the disc in the car or the unit for a long time. recording session was closed (finalized). Never expose the disc to direct sunlight. • Finalize the CD-R/CD-RW if necessary, and attempt playback Heat and humidity may damage the disc and you may not be again. able to play it again.

11-EN Using DVD-Rs/DVD-RWs/DVD+Rs/DVD+RWs • This unit is compatible with discs recorded in the standard CAUTION DVD-Video format. • Note that discs not finalized (processed to enable to play on Alpine accepts no responsibility for lost data, etc., even if data, etc., playback-only DVD players) cannot be played on this DVD is lost while using this product. player. • Some discs may not play back, depending on the recording On Handling USB Memory device and disc format. • This unit can control a memory storage device that supports the • Discs or files utilizing copy protection, may not be playable. USB Mass Storage Class (MSC) protocol. Playable audio file Some recording systems may not properly format copied files to formats are MP3, WMA and AAC. enable proper playback. • USB memory function is not guaranteed. Use USB memory • In the following cases, the disc may not play on this unit: according to the terms of agreement. Read the USB memory discs recorded by certain DVD recorders, certain irregular discs, Owner’s Manual thoroughly. flawed discs, dirty discs, when the pickup lens of this DVD • Avoid usage or storage in the following locations: player is dirty, or when moisture condensation has occurred Anywhere in the car exposed to direct sunlight or high inside the unit. temperatures. • Be sure to follow all cautions included with your DVD-Rs/ Anywhere the possibility of high humidity or corrosive DVD-RWs/DVD+Rs/DVD+RWs discs. substances are present. • Do not put stickers, seals, or tape on the label side of DVD-Rs/ • Fix the USB memory in a location where driver operation will DVD-RWs/DVD+Rs/DVD+RWs. not be hindered. • Compared to the regular discs, DVD-Rs/DVD-RWs/DVD+Rs/ • USB memory may not function correctly at high or low DVD+RWs are more affected by heat, moisture, and direct temperature. sunlight. If left in a car, etc., damage may occur and it might not • Use only certified USB memory. Note that even certified USB play on this unit. memory, may not function correctly depending on its type or • The operable temperature range for disc playback is as follows: state. DVD-R/DVD-RW: -25 ~ +70°C • Depending on the settings of the USB memory type, memory DVD+R/DVD+RW: +5 ~ +55°C state or encoding software, the unit may not play back or display properly. Disc terminology • Files protected by DRM (Digital Rights Management), cannot be played back on this unit. These include AAC formatted files Title purchased from the iTunes Store and WMA or other files with If titles are programmed for the DVD, these are the largest units of some form of copyright protection. division of the information recorded on the disc. • USB memory may take time to start playback. If there is a Chapter particular file other than audio in the USB memory, it may take Each Title may also be divided into smaller divisions, called considerable time before the file is played back or searched. chapters. These can be specific scenes or musical selections. • The unit can play back “mp3,” “wma” or “m4a” file extensions. • Do not add the above extensions to a file other than audio data. Protecting the USB connector This non-audio data will not be recognized. The resulting • Only an iPod/iPhone, USB memory or Mobile Phone can be playback may contain noise that can damage speakers and/or connected to the USB connector on this unit. Correct amplifiers. performance using other USB products cannot be guaranteed. • It is recommended to back up important data on a personal • If the USB connector is used, be sure to use only the supplied computer. connector cable with the unit. A USB hub is not supported. • Do not remove the USB device while playback is in progress. • Depending on the connected USB memory device, the unit may Change SOURCE to something other than USB, then remove the not function or some functions may not be performed. USB device to prevent possible damage to its memory. • The audio file format that can be played back on the unit is MP3/ WMA/AAC. • The video file format that can be played back on the unit is DivX®. • Artist/song name, etc., can be displayed. Certain, special characters may not be correctly displayed.

12-EN • This item incorporates copy protection technology that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights of Rovi Corporation. Reverse engineering and disassembly are prohibited. • Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. • Windows Media, and the Windows logo are trademarks, or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. • iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano, iPod touch, and iTunes are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. • “Made for iPod,” and “Made for iPhone,” mean that an electronic accessory has been designed to connect specifically to iPod, or iPhone, respectively, and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance standards. Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and regulatory standards. Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod, or iPhone may affect wireless performance. • Pandora, the Pandora logo, and the Pandora trade dress are trademarks or registered trademarks of Pandora Media, Inc., used with permission. Pandora is currently available in the U.S., Australia and New Zealand. • SIRIUS, XM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of SIRIUS XM Radio Inc. and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. • This device will control Pandora when connected to a compatible Android™ or BlackBerry® phone that has Bluetooth, access to the internet, and the latest version of the Pandora® application installed. • BlackBerry®, RIM®, Research In Motion®, SureType® and related trademarks, names and logos are the property of Research In Motion Limited and are registered and/or used in the U.S. and countries around the world. Used under license from Research In Motion Limited. • DivX®, DivX Certified® and associated logos are trademarks of Rovi Corporation or its subsidiaries and are used under license. • The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Alpine Electronics, Inc. is under licence. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners. • The terms HDMI and HDMI High-Definition Multimedia Interface, and the HDMI Logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing, LLC in the United States and other countries. • “MPEG Layer-3 audio coding technology licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson.” • “Supply of this product only conveys a license for private,non- commercial use and does not convey a license nor imply any right to use this product in any commercial (i.e. revenue- generation) real time broadcasting (terrestrial, satellite, cable and/or any other media), broadcasting/streaming via internet, intranets and/or other networks or in other electronic content distribution systems, such as pay-audio or audio-on-demand applications. An independent license for such use is required. For details, please visit http://www.mp3licensing.com” • Portions ©2014, Microsoft Corporation. All Rights Reserved. • Android is a trademark of Google Inc. • ©1987-2014 HERE. All rights reserved. • is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo Licensing Corporation.

13-EN Remote Sensor Point the remote control transmitter towards the remote Getting Started sensor within a range of 2 meters.

Optional Remote Control Interface Box Accessory List This unit is operable using the vehicle’s secondary radio controls. An Alpine Remote Control Interface Box (optional) is required. For • INE-W960/INE-NAV-60/INE-W960S ...... 1 details, contact your Alpine dealer. • Power cable...... 1 Controllable with Remote Control • Flush head screw (M5×8)...... 6 This unit can be controlled with an optional Alpine remote control. • Screw (M5×8) ...... 8 For details, consult your Alpine dealer. Point the optional remote • GPS Antenna ...... 1 control transmitter at the remote control sensor. • Antenna mounting plate ...... 1 • CAMERA/AUX/PRE OUT cable ...... 1 • USB extension cable ...... 1 About the button descriptions used in this Owner’s • Microphone...... 1 Manual • Mounting sleeve ...... 1 The buttons found on the face of the unit are expressed in • Face plate...... 1 bold (e.g. MUTE). The buttons found on the touch-screen • Bracket key...... 2 display are shown in bold within brackets, [ ] (e.g. []). • Owner’s Manual ...... 1set

Location of Controls Turning Power On or Off

Some of this unit’s functions cannot be performed while the vehicle is in motion. Be sure to stop your vehicle in a safe location and apply the parking brake and footbrake, before attempting these operations.

1 Turn the ignition key to the ACC or ON position. The system turns on. • When turned on, the system displays the last mode screen that was displayed before the ignition key was turned off. For example, if the unit is in radio mode when ignition is turned off, it will remain in radio mode when ignition is turned back on.

2 Press and hold the MUTE button for at least 3 seconds to turn the power off. • The unit can be turned on by pressing any button. (Eject) button • The INE-W960/INE-NAV-60/INE-W960S is a precision device. Ejects a disc. Careful handling of the unit should provide you with years of trouble- / (UP/DOWN) button free operation. Press to adjust the volume. MUTE/C button Press to activate /deactivate the mute mode. Press and hold for at least 3 seconds to turn the power off. (Phone)/VOICE CTRL. button Recalls the Telephone Menu screen. When a voice dial compatible hands-free phone is connected, press and hold for at least 3 seconds to switch to the Voice Dial screen. / button This action varies according to the Audio/Visual source. (Track Up/Down, Fast reverse/Fast forward, etc.) / button Each time you press this button, the Navigation mode and the Audio/Visual Source mode are changed alternately. Press and hold for at least 3 seconds to activate the Quick Sound screen. For details of navigation operations, refer to “Navigation System OM” in the website at http://www.alpine-usa.com. DISC Slot RESET switch The system of this unit is reset.

14-EN Turning the System On Inserting/Ejecting a Disc

With the Alpine system, when the ignition key is turned to ACC or ON, the opening screen will be automatically displayed. Inserting the Disc

1 When the system is used for the first time, the Insert the disc with the label side facing up. language selection menu is displayed. There are 24 languages to choose from. Touch [] or [] to scroll the list, and then touch the desired language. Disc Slot

When you insert the disc up to certain point, it is automatically pulled into the unit. The unit starts to play the disc. • You can also scroll through lists by touching the screen and sliding your finger up and down. • Do not touch the surface of the disc directly with your fingers. • Before inserting or removing the disc, always turn the ignition key to 2 Touch [OK]. ACC or ON. You cannot remove or insert the disc with the ignition The radio screen is displayed. key turned to OFF. • Some of this unit’s functions cannot be performed while the vehicle is in motion. Be sure to stop your vehicle in a safe location and apply Removing the Disc the parking brake before attempting these operations. Press (Eject button). When the disc has been ejected part way, take it out. If the disc cannot be ejected by pressing , press and hold Initial System Start-Up again for at least 5 seconds.

Be sure to press the RESET switch when using the unit for the first time, after changing the car battery, etc. Adjusting the Volume Press RESET with a ballpoint pen or similar pointed object. Adjust the volume by pressing or . Volume decreases/increases continuously by pressing and RESET switch holding or . Volume: 0 - 35

Lowering Volume Quickly

Audio Mute function instantly lowers the volume level to 0.

1 Press MUTE button to activate the MUTE mode. The audio level will be 0.

2 Pressing MUTE button again will bring the audio back to its previous level.

15-EN *5 If the TuneIt App is not launched, this option is not available. Top banner and Bottom banner Fade Out *6 When Camera Select is set to “Off,” this option is not available. Setting Screen Off Function When “Top/Bottom Banner Fade Out” is set to “ON,” the Top banner This mode is useful if you feel the unit’s display is too bright at night. and Bottom banner on the Audio/Visual Playback screen fade out after 5 To cancel Screen Off mode, touch the screen. seconds if no operation is performed. To display the keys again, touch the middle of the screen. • Screen Off mode is canceled when the power or ACC is turned off. • When the gear lever is shifted to the reverse (R) position while the Top banner rear camera is connected, the rear camera image is displayed. • When a call is received while a BLUETOOTH device is connected, the incoming call screen is displayed.

About Sound Menu button

Touch [Sound] icon on the screen to change the screen to the Sound Menu screen. Refer to “Sound Setup” (page 34).

Bottom banner

[Sound] menu icon

Sound Menu Screen • For details of how to set Top/Bottom Banner Fade Out, refer to “Setting Top banner and Bottom banner Display” (page 31).

Switching Sources

During audio/visual playback, touch a source button in the top banner to switch to the desired source.

Switching Sources Using the Top banner Touch the source button for the Top banner at the top of the Audio/ Visual Playback screen and select the desired source.

Source button

Top banner

If the source button is hidden, touch [<<] [>>].

Radio / Disc*1 / USB/iPod*1 / Pandora®*1, 2 / Bluetooth Audio / SiriusXM*3 / AUX*4 / Notification List*5 / Camera*6 / Screen Off

*1 When no disc is inserted or no USB memory/iPod is connected, this option is not available. *2 INE-W960/INE-NAV-60 only. *3 If the SiriusXM is not connected, this option is not available (INE- W960/INE-NAV-60 only). *4 When AUX In is set to “iPod Video,” this option is not available.

16-EN Touch Operation About the Indicator Display

You can operate the system by using the touch panel on the screen. The Indicator Bar at the bottom of the screen displays various types of information, like the current time. • Be sure to touch the onscreen button lightly with the pad of your finger to protect the display. • If you touch a button and there is no reaction, remove your finger from the display once, and try again. • Onscreen buttons that cannot be operated appear dull in color.

Common onscreen buttons []:Returns to the previous screen. Depending on the function, this button may cancel the operations performed on the screen. []:Closes the window.

The display will differ depending on the source. For details, refer to the display example of each source. Lights up when connected to a BLUETOOTH compatible device. : BLUETOOTH connection to audio device : BLUETOOTH connection to Hands Free Phone Blinks while reconnecting. Does not display when connection is set to OFF. Indicates the battery level of the connected BLUETOOTH device.

Selecting an Item in a List Battery No Battery Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level To scroll through a list, perform the following operations. Icon

Touch the screen and slide your finger up and down. This may not be displayed depending on the connected The screen will scroll along with your finger movement. BLUETOOTH device. Also, you can touch [] and []. Indicates the signal strength level of the connected BLUETOOTH compatible device. Displayed when BLUETOOTH setting is ON.

0123No Service

The clock display You can switch between the 12 hour display and 24 hour display options. For details on how to set the clock display, refer to “Clock Display Setting” (page 31). • After touching the screen, move your finger away from the screen before dragging and that item will be selected.

17-EN Displaying Audio/Visual Information on the Navigation screen

You can display the currently playing information (Frequency, Track No., etc.) in the Indicator Bar of the Navigation screen.

Touch [].

18-EN Radio/RBDS Presetting Stations Manually

The RBDS (Radio Broadcast Data System) is a radio information 1 Tune in a desired radio station you wish to store in system. The RBDS allows you to receive a variety of information such the preset memory by manual or automatic seek as traffic information, station names. tuning.

Display example for Radio main screen 2 Touch and hold any one of the preset buttons for at least 2 seconds. The selected station is stored.

3 Repeat the procedure to store up to 5 other stations onto the same band. To use this procedure for other bands, simply select the desired band and repeat the procedure. A total of 18 stations can be stored in the preset memory (6 stations for each band; FM1, FM2 or AM). • If a preset memory has already been set in the same preset number, it will be cleared and the new station will be memorized.

Band display Presetting Stations Automatically Displays the band of the signal currently being received. The tuner can automatically seek and store 6 strong stations in the Frequency display selected band in ascending order of frequency. Displays the frequency, song name and artist name of the signal currently being received. After selecting the desired band, touch [A.Memo] of Preset button Bottom banner. Registers and recalls preset frequencies. The tuner automatically seeks and stores 6 strong stations into Seek mode the preset buttons in ascending order of frequency. Displays the current Seek mode. When automatic storing has completed, the station stored in the preset 1 is selected. • If no stations are stored, the tuner will return to the original station Listening to the Radio you were listening to before the automatic storing procedure began. • You can cancel this process by touching [A.Memo] while the tuner is automatically seeking stations. Canceling will return the tuner preset 1 Touch [Radio] of Top banner. to the previous setting. The radio mode is activated and the display changes to the Radio mode screen.

2 Touch [Band] of Bottom banner to select the Tuning to Preset Stations desired radio band. Each touch changes the bands as follows: You can tune in the preset stations in memory on either band using its preset number. FM1 FM2 AM FM1 1 Touch [Band] of Bottom banner repeatedly until the 3 Touch [Tune] to select the tuning mode. desired band is displayed. DX Seek Local Seek Manual 2 Touch any one of the preset buttons that has a station stored to it. • There are two modes you can select for auto tuning, DX and The preset station is received. Local: - DX (Distance) mode; • Each time you press the , buttons, you can also change Both strong and weak stations will be tuned in. the frequency registered into the preset buttons (1 through 6). - Local mode; Only strong stations will be tuned in. The initial setting is DX. 4 Touch [], [], [] or [] to change the radio frequency up or down respectively. In manual mode, touch and hold to change the frequency continuously.

19-EN PTY (Program Type) Tuning

FM Radio mode

1 Touch [PTY] of Bottom banner. The Select PTY list screen is displayed.

2 Touch the selected program type to start searching for a station in the type. If no PTY station is found, “No PTY.” will be displayed.

Displaying Radio Text

Text messages from a radio station can be displayed.

1 Tune in a radio station that transmits text messages. 2 Touch [Info] in the bottom banner in FM radio mode repeatedly to switch to the desired display.

RBDS

Station Info Mode (PS/PTY/ Frequency/Song Name)

Song Info Mode (PS/Song Name/Artist Name/Album Name)

Radio Text Mode (Radio Text)

20-EN CD/MP3/WMA/AAC Repeat Play Touch [] to repeatedly play back. Display example for MP3/WMA/AAC main screen The tracks (files) will be played repeatedly. The repeat mode switches every time the button is touched.

CD:

Repeat (OFF) Repeat

MP3/WMA/AAC:

Repeat Repeat Folder* (OFF) Repeat

* Only files in a folder are repeatedly played back. Song title • If the Repeat Play mode is activated during M.I.X. playback, the Artist title M.I.X. mode will be canceled. Album title Current song no./Total song no. Playing time M.I.X. (Random Play) • If there is no CD text, the message “No Text” appears. Touch [] of Bottom banner during playback. The tracks (files) on the disc will be played back in a random Playback sequence. The M.I.X. mode switches every time [] is touched.

1 Touch [Disc] of Top banner. CD: The display shows the Disc mode screen. M.I.X. (OFF) M.I.X. When a disc is inserted into the disc slot of this unit, with the label side facing up, the unit starts playback of the disc. MP3/WMA/AAC: 2 Touch [] or [] to select the desired track (file). Returning to the beginning of the current track (file): M.I.X. Folder* (OFF) M.I.X. Folder* Touch []. Fast reverse : Touch and hold []. * Only files in a folder are played back in random sequence. • If the M.I.X. mode is activated during Repeat playback, the Repeat Advancing to the beginning of the next track (file) : Play mode will be canceled. Touch []. • If you select a track by using the search mode, the M.I.X. play mode Fast forward : will be canceled. Touch and hold []. • The , buttons provide the same functions above. M.I.X. ALL (Shuffle Songs) (Concerning 3 To pause playback, touch [ / ]. MP3/WMA/AAC) [] is displayed in the middle of the screen. Touch [/] again or touch [] in the middle of the screen All files in the disc are played back in random sequence. to start playback. • The INE-W960/INE-NAV-60/INE-W960S can play back MP3/WMA/ 1 Touch [ (Search)] of Bottom banner during AAC files saved to CD or DVD. Use a format compliant with this playback. unit. For further information about playing or storing MP3/WMA/AAC 2 Touch [Shuffle Songs]. files, refer to pages 22 and 23 before using the unit. The indicator lights, and the songs in a folder are • Any file protected by DRM (Digital Rights Management) copy played back in random sequence. When all the songs in the protection, cannot be played back on this unit. target folder have been played, the next folder plays back. • If a disc contains both audio data and MP3/WMA/AAC data, this unit plays back only the audio data. To cancel M.I.X. play, touch []. • The track display for CD audio data playback shows the track numbers recorded on the disc. • If an MP3/WMA/AAC disc with many files and folders is played, it may take longer than normal to start playback. • The playback time may not be correctly displayed when a VBR (Variable Bit Rate) recorded file is played back.

21-EN Selecting Folders (Concerning MP3/ About MP3/WMA/AAC WMA/AAC)

Touch [] or [] of Bottom banner to select the CAUTION folder. Except for private use, duplicating audio data (including MP3/ WMA/AAC data) or distributing, transferring, or copying it, whether for free or for a fee, without permission of the copyright holder is strictly prohibited by the Copyright Act and by Searching from CD Text international treaty.

What is MP3? 1 Touch [ (Search)] of Bottom banner during playback. MP3, whose official name is “MPEG Audio Layer 3,” is a The CD text search screen is displayed. compression standard prescribed by the ISO, the International Standardization Organization and MPEG which is a joint activity 2 Touch the selected track name. institution of the IEC. The selected track will be played back. MP3 files contain compressed audio data. MP3 encoding is capable of compressing audio data at extremely high ratios, • For details on how to scroll through the list, refer to “Selecting an reducing the size of music files to as much as one-tenth their Item in a List” (page 17). original size. This is achieved while still maintaining near CD quality. The MP3 format realizes such high compression ratios by eliminating the sounds that are either inaudible to the human File/Folder Name Search (Concerning ear or masked by other sounds. MP3/WMA/AAC) What is AAC? AAC is the abbreviation for “Advanced Audio Coding,” and is a basic format of audio compression used by MPEG2 or MPEG4. 1 Touch [ (Search)] of Bottom banner during playback. What is WMA? The folder name list screen is displayed. WMA, or “Windows Media™ Audio,” is compressed audio data. WMA is similar to MP3 audio data. Folder Name Search mode Method for creating MP3/WMA/AAC files 2 Touch [] in the desired folder. Audio data is compressed using software with MP3/WMA/AAC The first file in the selected folder is played back. codecs. For details on creating MP3/WMA/AAC files, refer to the user’s manual for that software. File Name Search mode MP3/WMA/AAC files that are playable on this device have the file extensions. Touch the desired folder name. MP3: “mp3” 2 WMA: “wma” (ver. 7.x, 8.x, 9.x are supported) The File name of the selected folder is displayed. AAC: “m4a” WMA is not supported for the following files, Windows Media 3 Touch the desired file name. Audio Professional, Windows Media Audio 9 Voice or Windows The selected file is played back. Media Audio 9 Pro Lossless (Disc Media Only). • To return to the previous hierarchy, touch []. There are many different versions of the AAC format. Confirm • For details on how to scroll through the list, refer to “Selecting an that the software being used conforms to the acceptable Item in a List” (page 17). formats listed above. It’s possible that the format may be • After selecting a folder via a Folder name search, touch [] on the unplayable even though the extension is valid. main screen to display the folder search screen. Playback of AAC files encoded by iTunes is supported. • After selecting a file via a File name search, touch [] on the main screen to display the file search screen.

22-EN Supported playback sampling rates and bit rates Order of files

MP3 Files are played back in the order that the writing software writes them to the disc. Therefore, the playback order may not be Sampling rates: 8 kHz - 48 kHz (Disc/USB) what’s expected. Verity the writing order in the software’s Bit rates: 8 kbps - 320 kbps (Disc/USB) documentation. The playback order of the folders and files is as follows. (The following numbers may differ from actually WMA displayed numbers.) Sampling rates: 32 kHz - 48 kHz (Disc) 8 kHz - 48 kHz (USB) Bit rates: 64 kbps - 256 kbps (Disc) 5 kbps - 384 kbps (USB)

AAC Root Sampling rates: 16 kHz - 96 kHz (Disc) Folder 8 kHz - 48 kHz (USB) Bit rates: 32 kbps - 384 kbps (Disc) 48 kbps - 238 kbps (USB)

This device may not play back correctly depending on sampling rates. ID3 tags/WMA tags

This device supports ID3 tag v1.0, v1.1, v2.2, v2.3, v2.4, and WMA tag Ver.1.x. If tag data is in an MP3/WMA/AAC file, this device can display the title (track title), artist name, and album name ID3 tag/WMA tag data (maximum 64 characters). The number of characters may be limited, or not correctly displayed, depending on the tag information. Playing back MP3/WMA/AAC MP3/WMA/AAC files are prepared, then written to a CD-R, CD- RW (DVD-R/DVD-RW/DVD+R/DVD+RW) using CD-R writing software and USB memory. • Maximum numbers of playable files / folders Disc: 2,000 files/200 folders (including Root Folder/DivX® file) Folder MP3/WMA/AAC File USB memory: 10,000 files/folders (including Root Folder/ DivX® file) Playback may not be performed if a disc exceeds the limitations described above. Terminology If a file/folder name is long, the maximum possible number of Bit rate files may decrease. • Both Audio and Video files are counted if their formats are This is the “sound” compression rate specified for encoding. The playable on this unit. higher the bit rate, the higher the sound quality, but also the larger the files. Media supported Sampling rate The media that this device can play back are CD-ROMs, CD-Rs, CD-RWs, DVD-Rs, DVD-RWs, DVD+Rs, DVD+RWs and USB This value shows how many times per second the data is sampled memory. (recorded). For example, music CDs use a sampling rate of 44.1 kHz, Corresponding File Systems so the sound is sampled (recorded) 44,100 times per second. The higher the sampling rate, the higher the sound quality, but also the This device supports discs formatted with ISO9660 Level 1 or larger the volume of data. Level 2, UDF1.02 and UDF1.02(ISO Bridge). Encoding Under the ISO9660 standard, there are some restrictions to remember. Converting music CDs, WAVE (AIFF) files, and other sound files into The maximum nested folder depth is 8 (including the root the specified audio compression format. directory). The number of characters for a folder/file name is Tag limited. Song information such as track titles, artist names, album names, Valid characters for folder/file names are letters A-Z (all caps), etc., written into MP3/WMA/AAC files. numbers 0-9, and ‘_’ (underscore). Root folder This device can play back discs in Joliet, Romeo, etc., and other standards that conform to ISO9660. However, sometimes the file The root folder (or root directory) is found at the top of the file names, folder names, etc., are not displayed correctly. system. The root folder contains all folders and files. It is created automatically for all burned discs. Formats supported This device supports CD-ROM Mode1, CD-ROM XA Mode2(Form1&2), Mixed Mode CD and Multi-Session. This device cannot correctly play back discs recorded with Track At Once or packet writing.

23-EN The DVD operation screen display Touch the screen while the DVD playback screen is DVD displayed. The DVD operation screen is displayed. Display example for DVD Video main screen

• The operation screen changes to the visual screen in the DVD mode for 5 seconds after an operation has been performed. Touch [<<], [>>] • If you try to activate the DVD while driving, the display will show the warning-Picture off for your safety. • Some operations cannot be carried out depending on the disc or playback screen. Display example for DivX® main screen

Touch [<<], [>>]

Information display-1 DVD-Video: Title name/Chapter No. DivX®: Title name/Current File No./Total File No. in Current Folder Information display-2 DVD-Video: Audio signal output/Subtitle/Angle DivX®: Audio signal output/Subtitle Playing time

Disc types that can be used for each heading are represented by the following marks.

DVD Commercial Video discs (used for the distribution of movies, etc.) or a DVD-R/DVD- RW, DVD+R/DVD+RW recorded in a video mode can be used.

CD-R/CD-RW/DVD-R/DVD-RW/DVD+R/ DVD+RW discs that are recorded in the DivX® mode can be used.

24-EN Playing a Disc If a Menu Screen Appears On DVD mode, menu screens may appear automatically. If this happens, perform the operation described below to start playback. WARNING It is dangerous for the driver to watch the DVD/TV/ Direct Menu Operations Video while driving the vehicle. The driver may be Touch the DVD menu directly. distracted from looking ahead and an accident could • Some operations cannot be performed depending on the disc. occur. Menu Operations Install the INE-W960/INE-NAV-60/INE-W960S correctly so that the driver cannot watch DVD/TV/Video unless 1 Touch [Key]. the vehicle is stopped and the emergency brake is The menu operation mode will be displayed. applied.

If the INE-W960/INE-NAV-60/INE-W960S is not installed correctly, the driver will be able to watch the DVD/TV/Video while driving the vehicle and may be distracted from looking ahead causing an accident. The driver or other people could be severely injured.

Caution • Not all functions will operate for every DVD. See the Touch [] [] to change the Key panel location individual DVD’s instructions for details on the from right to left or vice-versa. features supported. Touch [Return] to return to the previous display. • Fingerprints on a disc may adversely affect Select a desired menu item by touching [], [], playback. If a problem occurs, remove the disc and 2 [] or []. check for fingerprints on the playback side. Clean the disc if necessary. • If you switch the power or Ignition key OFF or change sources during playback, playback will continue where you left off when you resume playback. • If you try to perform an invalid operation (based on the type of disc being played), the following mark is displayed on the monitor screen:

• Touching [] in the operation panel returns to the screen in • Play Position Memory Function step 1. Even if you turn power off or switch the Ignition key • Touching [Key] displays the Numeric Keypad Input Mode to OFF during playback or change the source, screen. playback will continue from the point where For details of the Numeric Keypad Input Mode screen, refer to playback stopped when the power is turned ON “Numeric Keypad Input Operations” (page 26). again. 3 Touch [Enter] to confirm the selected item. Touch [Disc] of Top banner. The display shows the Disc mode screen. Or insert a disc with the label side facing up. The unit starts to play the disc. • The reverse side of a double-sided DVD will not be played automatically. Remove the disc, turn it over, and reinsert it. • Refer also to “Disc Setting” (page 42). • While reading a DivX® file, the fast-forwarding/fast-reversing and repeat functions, etc. cannot be used. • A DivX® file that exceeds 4GB cannot be played back.

25-EN Numeric Keypad Input Operations Stopping Playback

1 Touch [10Key] of Bottom banner. Touch and hold [] for at least 2 seconds during The numeric keypad input mode screen appears playback. If [10Key] is not displayed, touch [<<] in the bottom banner “ ” indicator and [] in the middle of the screen are displayed. to display [10Key]. • Playback starts from the beginning when [/ll] or [] in the 2 Touch a desired number. middle of the screen is touched while playback is stopped.

Fast-forwarding/Fast-reversing

1 During playback, touch and hold [] (Fast-reverse) or touch and hold [] (Fast-forward). Touch and hold for more than 1 second to forward/reverse at double speed. Touch [] to delete an entered number. Every time you touch [ ]/[ ] during fast- reverse/fast- Touch [Delete All] to delete all entered number. forward, the speed changes as follows: 2x 4x 8x 2x. Touch [Enter] on the numeric keypad mode screen 3 ® to confirm your selection. • For a DivX file that does not contain index information, the Touch [] to hide the keypad display. fast forward and the reverse option is not available. • The , buttons provide the same functions above.

Displaying the Top Menu Screen 2 Touch [/] to return to normal playback.

When a DVD contains two or more titles, the top menu screen appears. • No sound is played back during fast-forwarding/fast-reversing. • On DVD mode, the menu screen may reappear during fast- Touch [Top Menu] of Bottom banner. forwarding/fast-reversing. The top menu screen appears. • This operation may not be possible on certain discs. • To perform necessary operations, refer to “If a Menu Screen Appears” (page 25). Finding the Beginnings of Chapters/ Displaying the Menu Screen Tracks/Files

With a DVD having two or more menus, a menu screen will appear for During playback, touch [] or []. the programs available, in addition to the main programs. The chapter/track/file switches each time the button is touched, Touch [Menu] of Bottom banner. and playback of the selected chapter/track/file starts. The Root menu screen appears. : Touch this to start playback from the beginning of the current chapter, track or file. • To perform necessary operations, refer to “If a Menu Screen : Touch this to start playback from the beginning of the Appears” (page 25). following chapter, track or file.

• Some DVDs do not have chapters. Stopping Playback (PRE STOP) • The , buttons provide the same functions above.

Supplementary explanations Touch the stop button during playback to stop playback. That position is “Chapters” are divisions of movies or musical selections on DVDs. stored in the memory.

1 Touch [] during playback. “Pre ” indicator and [] in the middle of the screen are displayed.

2 Touch [/ll] in the PRE STOP mode or touch [] in the middle of the screen. Playback starts from the position at which it was stopped. • For some discs, the position at which playback was stopped may not be accurate.

26-EN Playing Still Frames (Pausing) Repeat Playback

Use this function to play the disc’s titles, chapters or tracks, etc., repeatedly. 1 During playback, Touch [/] of Bottom banner. Touch [] of Bottom banner. The repeat mode switches every time the button is touched. 2 Touch [/] or [] in the middle of the screen to resume playback. DVD Video • No sound is played during the still frame mode. • The image or sound may stop temporarily when playback starts from the pause mode. This is not a malfunction. (Chapter) The chapter is played repeatedly.

(Title) The title is played repeatedly. Slow Motion Playback (OFF) Playback returns to normal mode.

1 When [] is touched and held while in the pause mode, the 1/16th speed slow motion playback mode DivX® is set. Furthermore, when touched and held [] again, the slow motion speed switches to 1/2 the normal speed. (File) The file is played repeatedly. • The buttons provide the same functions above. (Folder) The folder is played repeatedly. 2 Touch [/] of Bottom banner to play back. • No sound is played during slow motion playback. (Repeat All) The disc is played repeatedly. • 1/2, 1/16 are approximate speeds. The actual speed differs from disc to disc. • You cannot execute reverse slow motion playback. Searching by Title Number

Selecting Folders Use this function to easily find positions on the DVD using the DVD’s titles. Perform operations while playback is stopped. Touch [] or [] of Bottom banner to select the folder. 1 Touch [10Key] of Bottom banner. • Touch [] to play from the first file of the previous folder. The numeric keypad input mode screen appears. Touch [] to play from the first file of the next folder. If [10Key] is not displayed, touch [<<] in the bottom banner to display [10Key]. • For DVD Video, the numeric keypad can also be displayed by touching the Menu screen and then touching [Key] twice.

2 Enter a desired title by touching its number. See page 26 for operation of the numeric keypad.

3 Touch [Enter]. Playback will start from the number selected.

4 Touch []. • This function cannot be used on discs on which no title numbers are recorded. • Some disc may not accept any operation.

27-EN Searching Directly by Chapter Number Switching the Angle

On DVDs in which scenes have been filmed from multiple angles, the angle can be switched during playback. Use this function to easily move to the beginnings of the chapters on the disc. Perform operations during playback, during PRE-STOP or while Touch [Angle] of Bottom banner. playback is paused. The angle switches between the angles recorded on the disc every time the button is touched. 1 Touch [10Key] of Bottom banner. If [Angle] is not displayed, touch [<<] or [>>] in the bottom banner The numeric keypad input mode screen will appear. to display [Angle]. If [10Key] is not displayed, touch [<<] in the bottom banner • Some time may be required for the angle to change. to display [10Key]. • Depending on the disc, the angle may switch in one of two ways. - Seamless: The angle switches smoothly. 2 Touch and enter the chapter number you want to - Non-seamless: When the angle is switched, a still picture is play. displayed first, after which the angle switches. See page 26 for operation of the numeric keypad. 3 Touch [Enter] to confirm your selection. Switching the Audio Tracks Playback will start from the selected chapter.

4 Touch []. DVDs with multiplex audio or audio languages allow switching the sound during playback. • This function is not available for a disc on which chapters are not Touch [Audio] of Bottom banner. stored. The sound switches between the alternate audio tracks recorded on the disc every time the button is touched. If [Audio] is not displayed, touch [<<] or [>>] in the bottom banner Searching for a Desired Video File to display [Audio]. • The alternate track selected becomes the default setting every time the power is turned on or the disc is replaced. If the disc does not You can select a video file from the list screen. include that track, the disc’s default language is selected instead. • Not all discs will allow changing the alternate audio tracks during 1 Touch [ (Search)] of Bottom banner. playback. In these cases, select audio tracks from the DVDs menu. The search mode is activated. • There may be a delay before the selected alternate track begins to play. 2 Touch [Video]. The folder list screen appears. Switching the Subtitles (Subtitle Folder Name Search mode Language) 3 Touch [] in the desired folder. The first file in the selected folder is played back. With DVDs on which multiple subtitle languages are recorded, the subtitle language can be switched during playback; moreover, subtitles File Name Search mode can be hidden. Touch [Subtitle] of Bottom banner. Touch the desired folder name. 3 Touching this button repeatedly selects sequentially the subtitle The File name of the selected folder is displayed. languages recorded on the disc, and then turns the subtitles 4 Touch the desired file name. OFF. If is not displayed, touch or in the bottom The selected file is played back. [Subtitle] [<<] [>>] banner to display [Subtitle]. • To return to the previous hierarchy, touch []. • For details on how to scroll through the list, refer to “Selecting an • There may be a delay before the selected subtitle appears. Item in a List” (page 17). • Not all discs will allow changing the subtitles during playback. In • After selecting a folder via a Folder name search, touch [] on the these cases, select subtitles from the DVDs menu. main screen to display the folder search screen. • The subtitle language selected becomes the default setting every time • After selecting a file via a File name search, touch [] on the the power is turned on or the disc is replaced. If the disc does not main screen to display the file search screen. include that language, the disc’s default language is selected instead. However, the subtitle language may differ depending on the disc.

28-EN About DivX®

DivX® is a codec (software) to compress moving images while maintaining image quality using a highly advanced compression ratio and operating speed.

• Official DivX® Certified product ABOUT DIVX VIDEO: DivX® is a digital video format created by DivX, LLC, a subsidiary of Rovi Corporation. This is an official DivX Certified® device that plays DivX video. Visit divx.com for more information and software tools to convert your files into DivX videos. ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This DivX Certified® device must be registered in order to play purchased DivX Video-on- Demand (VOD) movies. To obtain your registration code, locate the DivX VOD section in your device setup menu. Go to vod.divx.com for more information on how to complete your registration.

Media supported The unit can play back CD-R/CD-RW/DVD-R/DVD-RW/DVD+R/ DVD+RW discs and USB memory device that are recorded in the DivX® mode. • DivX® files stored in a USB memory device and protected by DRM (Digital Rights Management) cannot be played. • Some DivX files stored in a USB memory cannot be operated/ played.

Corresponding extension “avi,” “divx”

Video Codec DivX® versions 3, 4, 5, and 6 (versions 5 handle both interlaced and progressive)

Audio Codec MPEG1 Layer2 (MP2) 32 to 384 kbps MPEG1 Layer3 (MP3) 32 to 320 kbps MPEG2 Layer2 (MP2) 8 to 160 kbps MPEG2 Layer3 (MP3) 8 to 160 kbps Dolby Digital 32 to 448 kbps

Image bit rate “average 4 Mbps, Peak 8 Mbps” Home Theater Profile supported

29-EN 2 Touch [General]. Setup

Setup Operation

Touch the [SETUP] icon on the Audio/Visual Playback screen to display the Setup main screen.

[Setup] icon The General Setup screen appears.

3 Select the desired item.

General Setup

Setting items: Text Display / Clock Display / Top/Bottom Banner Fade Out / General Setup Operation Screen/LED Customize / Visual / About / Installation / Demo mode • Depending on the item, repeat step 3. To display the General Setup Menu screen: Your vehicle must be parked with the ignition key in the ACC or 4 Touch [] or [] etc., to change its setting. ON position. To do this, follow the procedures below. • When the pop-up window for setup is displayed, touch [] to 1 Bring your vehicle to a complete stop at a safe close the window after setting. location. Engage the parking brake. Touch [] to return to the previous screen. 2 Release the parking brake (for your safety, operate 5 while depressing the foot brake pedal). • Immediately after changing the settings of General Setup (While the 3 Engage the parking brake again. system is writing data automatically) do not turn the ignition key to OFF. Otherwise, the settings may not be changed. • For automatic transmission vehicles, place the transmission lever in the Park position. Now, the locking system for the General mode operation has Text Display Setting been released. Engaging the parking brake can reactivate the General Setup Menu, as long as the car’s ignition has not been turned off. It is not necessary to repeat the above procedure [Text Display] is selected on the General setup menu in step 3. Refer to (1 through 3) of “To display the General mode screen.” “General Setup Operation” (page 30). Each time the ignition is turned OFF, perform the procedure of “To display the General mode screen.” Setting the Scroll

Scroll display is available if CD text, folder name, file name or tag The following steps 1 to 5 are common operations to each information is entered. “Setting item” of General Setup. Refer to each section for details. Setting item: Auto Scroll Setting contents: Off (Initial setting) / On 1 Touch [Setup] icon of Top banner. Off: Turns off the scroll mode. The Setup main screen is displayed. On: Turns on the Auto scroll mode. Scroll display is repeated as long as the mode is turned on.

30-EN Format Settings Setting Top banner and Bottom banner The character code to be used for tag text information displayed on the Display screen can be selected from 7 character codes.

Setting item: Format [Top/Bottom Banner Fade Out] is selected on the General setup menu Setting contents: Latin-1 / Latin-9 (Initial setting) / Russian / in step 3. Refer to “General Setup Operation” (page 30). Chinese / Thai / Arabic / Hebrew You can configure the display setting for the Top banner and Bottom Latin-1: ISO 8859-1 banner for the audio/visual source. Latin-9: ISO 8859-15 Setting item: Top/Bottom Banner Fade Out Russian: ISO 8859-5 Setting contents: Off (Initial setting) / Top / Top and Bottom Chinese: GB18030 Off: Always displayed Thai: CP874 Top: Top banner will fade out after 5 seconds if no Arabic: CP1256 operations are performed. Hebrew: CP1255 Top and Bottom: Top banner and Bottom banner will fade out after 5 seconds if no operations are performed. Setting the Menu Language

The Setup menu, feedback information, etc. for this unit can be changed to appear in the selected language. Screen/LED Customize

Setting item: Language Touch [Screen/LED Customize] on the General setup menu in step 3. Setting contents: English / Spanish / French / Italian / German / Refer to “General Setup Operation” (page 30). Portuguese / Swedish / Finnish / Russian / Dutch / Norwegian / Thai / Arabic / Chinese / Czech / Danish / Greek / Hungarian / Polish / Setting the Brightness of the Backlighting Slovak / Turkish / Hebrew / Bahasa Indonesia / Bahasa Malay The illumination control adjusts the brightness of the backlighting based • Touch [OK] to confirm the language and display the screen in the on the car ambient lighting for easier viewing. specified language. Setting item: Dimmer Setting contents: Auto (Initial setting) / On / Off Auto: Adjust the brightness of the background illumination of Clock Display Setting the monitor automatically to the brightness of the car interior. [Clock Display] is selected on the General setup menu in step 3. Refer On: Keep the background illumination of the monitor dark. to “General Setup Operation” (page 30). Off: Deactivate Auto Dimmer mode to keep the background The clock indication on the monitor display is turned on or off illumination of the monitor bright. respectively. • When “Auto” or “On” is set, the setting is also applied for the button Setting item: Clock Display lighting in “Adjusting the Dimmer of Button Lighting at Night” Setting contents: Off / Type A (Initial setting) / Type B (page 32). Off: Not displayed Type A: The clock indication is displayed in the upper right Adjusting the Minimum Level of Backlight corner of the screen when the Top banner fades out. Type B: The clock indication is always displayed in the bottom You can adjust the brightness of the backlight. This function could be right corner of the screen. used, for instance, to change the screen brightness while traveling at night.

Setting item: Screen Dimmer Level Setting content: -15 to +15 (Initial setting: 0) You can adjust the level between MIN (-15) and MAX (+15). When it reaches the minimum or maximum point, the display shows “MIN” or “MAX” respectively.

31-EN Adjusting the Dimmer of Button Lighting at Visual Setting Night [Visual] is selected on the General setup menu in step 3. Refer to You can adjust the brightness of the button lighting at night with the “General Setup Operation” (page 30). dimmer.

Setting item: Key Illumination Level 1 Touch the desired item. Setting level: -2 to +2 (Initial setting: 0)

Switching the Display Color and Wallpaper Image (Background)

You can change the Display Color or Wallpaper Image. Copy the desired image file from a USB memory device to use on this device.

• Copiable image files - PNG (.png)/JPEG (.jpg) • “Current Source” can be setting while a video is playing. - Max Resolution=4000x4000 pixel • “Camera” can be set when “Camera Select” is set to “Rear.”

1 Touch [Background Customize]. 2 Touch [] of the desired item.

Display example for Background Setting main screen Setting item: Current Source (Video Media) / Camera Setting contents: Display Mode* / Brightness / Color / Contrast * Only “Current Source (Video Media)” can be set.

3 Touch [] or [] to change its setting. 4 Touch [] or [] to return to the previous screen. • Immediately after changing the settings of Display Setup (While the system is writing data automatically) do not turn the ignition key to OFF. Otherwise, the settings may not be changed.

Switching Display Modes

Setting item: Display Mode Setting contents: FULL (Initial setting) / NORMAL Wallpaper File List in USB memory • Built in Wallpaper Image File is “Alpine BG.” Preview of selected file Color select switch

Switching the Display Color

Setting Color: Blue (Initial setting) / Light Blue / Turquoise / Green / Red / Amber / Dark Yellow / Black In FULL mode, the monitor displays a normal picture wider to fit in a wide-screen monitor. 2 Touch the desired color select switch. The Display Color is changed. The changed Display Color will be reflected even if [OK] in the lower right of the screen is not touched.

Switching the Wallpaper Image (Background)

2 Select the desired file from the Wallpaper File List. In NORMAL mode, the monitor displays a normal picture at the The selected file is previewed. center of the screen with a vertical black band at each side.

3 Touch [OK]. The previewed image file is set as the Wallpaper Image. • You cannot change the color of the Wallpaper Image copied from a USB memory device.

32-EN Adjusting Brightness Checking the DivX® Registration

Setting item: Brightness This unit will display the registration code required to play a DivX® Setting content: -15 to +15 (Initial setting: 0) VOD (Video On Demand), or you can also display the deregistration You can adjust the brightness between MIN (-15) and MAX code. (+15). When it reaches the minimum or maximum point, the Setting item: Warranty/Copyright Info. display shows “MIN” or “MAX” respectively. Displaying the Registration Code Adjusting Color of Picture 1 Touch [Warranty/Copyright Info.]. Setting item: Color Setting content: -15 to +15 (Initial setting: 0) 2 Touch [DivX(R) VOD]. You can adjust the color between MIN (-15) and MAX (+15). 3 Touch [Registration]. When it reaches the minimum or maximum point, the display The registration code is displayed on the screen. shows “MIN” or “MAX” respectively. 4 Touch [OK]. Adjusting Image Contrast Displaying the Deregistration Code Setting item: Contrast Setting content: -15 to +15 (Initial setting: 0) 1 Touch [Warranty/Copyright Info.]. You can adjust the contrast between LOW (-15) and HIGH (+15). 2 Touch [DivX(R) VOD]. When it reaches the minimum or maximum point, the display shows “LOW” or “HIGH” respectively. 3 Touch [Deregistration]. The confirmation dialog screen appears. About INE-W960/INE-NAV-60/INE-W960S 4 Touch [OK]. The deregistration code is displayed on the screen. [About] is selected on the General setup menu in step 3. Refer to • When you have finished, touch [Cancel]. If you want to continue and “General Setup Operation” (page 30). display a new registration code, touch [OK], check the registration code, and then touch [OK] again. Displaying the Product Information Initializing the System You can view the version information of this product. Make note of this information and refer to it whenever you contact Alpine Tech Support or You can initialize all data, to restore the factory settings. Remove the an Alpine-authorized dealer. CD/DVD disc, etc. from the system before operation

Setting item: Version Info Setting item: Restore Factory Setting Setting content: Serial No. / Firmware Version 1 Touch [Restore Factory Setting]. 2 After the confirmation message appears, touch [OK]. The confirmation screen appears again.

3 Touch [OK]. The system starts initialization. • Do not turn on/off the power or change the ignition key position until system restart is completed.

33-EN Installation Setup Sound Setup

[Installation] is selected on the General setup menu in step 3. See “General Setup Operation” (page 30). Sound Setup Operation Setting item: Installation The Installation check screen is displayed.

To display the Sound Setup Menu screen: Your vehicle must be parked with the ignition key in the ACC or ON position. To do this, follow the procedures below. 1 Bring your vehicle to a complete stop at a safe location. Engage the parking brake. 2 Release the parking brake (for your safety, operate while depressing the foot brake pedal). 3 Engage the parking brake again. • For automatic transmission vehicles, place the transmission lever in the Park position. Demonstration Setup Now, the locking system for the Sound mode operation has been released. Engaging the parking brake can reactivate the Sound Setup Menu, as long as the car’s ignition has not been turned off. [Demo mode] is selected on the General setup menu in step 3. Refer to It is not necessary to repeat the above procedure “General Setup Operation” (page 30). (1 through 3) of “To display the Sound mode screen.” Each time the ignition is turned OFF, perform the procedure of “To display the Sound mode screen.” Setting Demo mode to Off/On

This unit has a Demonstration feature for the display. When you install The following steps 1 to 5 are common operations to each and use the unit for the first time, the unit will enter demo mode “Setting item” of Sound Setup. Refer to each section for details. automatically. To quit demo mode, set Demo mode to Off.

Setting item: Demo mode 1 Touch [Setup] icon of Top banner. Setting contents: Off / On (Initial setting) The Setup main screen is displayed. • If you perform an operation during the Demo mode, the demonstration is temporarily stopped. 2 Touch [Sound].

The Sound Menu screen appears.

3 Select the desired item.

Setting items: Car Specific Sound Setup* / Media Xpander* / EQ Presets* / Quick Sound / TCR (Time Correction) / X-Over* / Parametric EQ* / Other / Defeat* * When BASS ENGINE SQ of Quick Sound Setup is set to “On,” the message “This function cannot be used now. Please check Sound APP connection and BASS ENGINE SQ settings.” will be displayed. This setting cannot be selected.

34-EN 4 Touch [] or [] etc., to change its setting. • When the pop-up window for setup is displayed, touch [] to Setting the MX (Media Xpander) close the window after setting. [Media Xpander] is selected on the Sound setup menu in step 3. Refer Touch [] to return to the previous screen. 5 to “Sound Setup Operation” (page 34). • Immediately after changing the Sound Setup (while the system is MX (Media Xpander) makes vocals or instruments sound distinct writing data automatically) do not turn the ignition key to OFF. regardless of the music source. The CD, USB memory and iPod/iPhone, Otherwise, the settings may not be changed. will be able to reproduce the music clearly even in cars with a lot of road noise. Car Specific Sound Setup Setting item: Media Xpander 1 Touch [On] of “ALL MX Off/On” in the MX setup [Car Specific Sound Setup] is selected on the Sound setup menu in screen. step 3. Refer to “Sound Setup Operation” (page 34). You can set and reproduce the best audio environment for the environment in your car.

1 Touch the relevant Vehicle type.

2 Touch any of [] [] [] []. Level Media Off 1 2 3 Radio (FM) 2 Touch the position of the driver’s seat. DVD 3 Touch the size of the front speaker. CD Compressed Select whether or not there is a tweeter. 4 Media (CMPM) 5 Select the installation position of the rear speaker. If you select “No rear speaker,” you cannot adjust the rear Pandora speaker in Fader/Time Correction/X-Over in sound setup. AUX SiriusXM 6 Select whether or not there is a subwoofer. If you select “No,” you cannot adjust the subwoofer level/ • The MX setting can be performed only when a source is currently subwoofer phase in sound setup. selected. • MP3/WMA/AAC/iPod/USB Audio/DivX®/Bluetooth Audio 7 Select the material of the car seats. correspond to MX Compressed Media. The settings confirmation screen is displayed. • If the car seats are made of both leather and fabric, select [Half MX FM Leather]. The medium to high frequencies become more clear, and produces well balanced sound in all the bands. 8 Check the settings and touch [OK]. MX DVD (Movie) The dialog portion of the video is reproduced more clearly. (DVD Music) This disc contains a large quantity of data such as music clip. MX uses this data to reproduce the sound accurately.

• If Preset3 was already saved for Time Correction/X-Over/Parametric EQ, the data will be overwritten. • The Car Specific Sound settings are reflected in the following Audio Setup items: - Adjusting the Parametric Equalizer Curve (Parametric EQ) - Adjusting the Time Correction (TCR) - Adjusting the Crossover Settings (X-Over) • The Equalizer Presets (EQ Presets) settings are FLAT.

35-EN MX CD CD mode processes a large quantity of data. This data is used Adjusting the Subwoofer Level to reproduce the sound cleanly by making use of the data quantity. You can set the Subwoofer level when a Subwoofer is connected. MX SiriusXM Setting item: SubW. Level The medium to high frequencies become more clear, and Setting contents: 0 to 15 (Initial setting: 0) produces well balanced sound in all the bands. • If the Subwoofer setting is “Off,” the setting cannot be set. MX Compressed Media • When BASS ENGINE SQ is set to “On,” this setting cannot be set. This corrects information that was omitted at the time of compression. This reproduces a well-balanced sound close to the original. Setting the MX (Media Xpander)

MX Pandora For details on Setting the MX (Media Xpander), refer to page 35. This corrects information that was omitted at the time of compression. This reproduces a well-balanced sound close to • When “ALL MX Off” is set, you cannot adjust MX level on the Quick the original. Sound screen. When BASS ENGINE SQ is set to “On,” the setting is not available. MX AUX • Choose the MX mode (CMPM, Movie, or Music) that corresponds to the media connected. Setting the BASS ENGINE SQ • To cancel MX mode for all music sources, set MX to “Off” in step 1. • Each music sources, such as CD and MP3/WMA/AAC can have its Selecting BASS ENGINE Type in BASS ENGINE SQ optimizes sound own MX setting. in all zones of the vehicle. Select the desired BASS ENGINE Type according to the music genre and mood for well-balanced and effective bass sound. Equalizer Presets (EQ Presets) Touch BASS ENGINE SQ [On]. The BASS ENGINE SQ select screen is displayed. [EQ Presets] is selected on the Sound setup menu in step 3. Refer to “Sound Setup Operation” (page 34). 10 typical equalizer settings are preset at the factory for a variety of musical source material.

Setting item: EQ Presets Setting contents: FLAT (Initial setting) / POP / ROCK / NEWS / JAZZ / ELECTRONICA/DANCE / HIP HOP / EASY LISTENING / COUNTRY / CLASSICAL • Only one type can be set to ON. • When EQ Presets is set, the interlinked Parametric EQ settings are also changed. We recommend storing Parametric EQ settings in the BASS ENGINE Level Preset in advance. BASS ENGINE Type • The EQ Presets setting can be configured when Defeat is “Off.” • When BASS ENGINE SQ is set to “On,” Car Specific Sound Setup/ Parametric EQ/Media Xpander/EQ Presets/X-Over cannot be Quick Sound Setup operated as they are adjusted automatically. Defeat is set to “Off.”

[Quick Sound] is selected on the Sound setup menu in step 3. Refer to “Sound Setup Operation” (page 34).

Adjusting Bass Level/Treble Level

Setting item: Bass/Treble Setting contents: -7 to +7 (Initial setting: 0) • When BASS ENGINE SQ is set to “On,” this setting cannot be set. • Adjustment cannot be performed when Defeat is set to “On.” • The Bass adjusted setting value is interlinked with Band2 of Parametric EQ, and the Treble adjusted setting value is interlinked with Band8.

36-EN Setting the BASS ENGINE Type Adjusting the Time Correction (TCR) You can set your favorite BASS ENGINE type. [TCR] is selected on the Sound setup menu in step 3. Refer to “Sound Setting contents: Standard (Initial setting) / Punch / Rich / Mid Setup Operation” (page 34). Bass / Low Bass Before performing the following procedures, refer to “About Time Standard: Natural low-pitched sound located in front of front Correction” (page 40). seats. Punch: Punched bass sound, massive, with a feeling of Setting item: TCR (Time Correction) speed. [ms] [cm] Rich: You can feel wrapped with rich Low-pitched sound 1 Touch or to select mode for making by arranging super-low-pass, low-pass, and mid adjustments. lowpass, with sufficient balance. Each time you touch, the onscreen button and correction Mid Bass: Emphasizes the presence of an upper bass. mode changes. Reproduces low-pass with a sense of speed. Low Bass: Super-low-pass presence and a low-pitched sound which is oriented downwards with deep feeling.

• The function is disabled when BASS ENGINE SQ is set to “Off.”

Adjusting the BASS ENGINE Level

You can adjust the BASS ENGINE Level.

Setting item: Level Correction mode Setting contents: 0 to 6 (Initial setting: 3) ms: Adjust time. • The function is disabled when BASS ENGINE SQ is set to “Off.” cm: Adjust listening position and distance from each speaker. • The Level 0 of the BASS ENGINE SQ is common to all the types. 2 Touch [] or [] for each speaker to adjust the About Setup when the external power amplifier is time or distance. connected 0.0msec to 9.9msec (0.1msec/step) 0.0cm to 336.6cm (3.4cm/step) In order to optimize the BASS ENGINE SQ, we recommend the All speaker setting values are adjustable in the range of 15ms or following procedure to set up the power amplifier. 510cm. After setting up, the BASS ENGINE Level will be adjusted according to the music. 3 To store the adjusted setting value, touch and hold 1) Set GAIN of the power amplifier to “MIN.” [Preset1], [Preset2], or [Preset3] for at least 2 2) Set the Crossover Mode Sector switch to “OFF.” seconds. • If the switch has no “OFF” position, set as near as possible to • Touch [Flat] to set all values to 0.0. full range. • If the Rear Speaker setting is “Off,” the Rear Speaker setting cannot 3) Set the BASS ENGINE SQ of this unit to “ON,” and the be edited (Refer to page 39). BASS ENGINE Level to “3.” • If the Subwoofer setting is “Off,” the Subwoofer setting cannot be 4) Play a song of the genre you frequently listen to, and edited (Refer to page 39). adjust GAIN of the power amplifier. Calling the Time Correction Value Adjusting the Fader/Balance Calling the pre-set time correction value. Touch [Preset1], [Preset2], or [Preset3] on the time 1 Touch [Fader/Balance]. correction screen. The Fader/Balance setting screen is displayed. The setting stored in the Preset will be recalled.

Image area *

2 Touch the desired point within the image area. Or touch [] [] [] [].

Fader: F15 to R15 Balance: L15 to R15 * Touch to return the Fader/Balance value to “00” (center).

37-EN Adjusting the Crossover Settings (X- Adjusting the Parametric Equalizer Over) Curve (Parametric EQ)

[X-Over] is selected on the Sound setup menu in step 3. Refer to [Parametric EQ] is selected on the Sound setup menu in step 3. Refer “Sound Setup Operation” (page 34). to “Sound Setup Operation” (page 34). Before performing the following procedures, refer to “About the You can modify the Equalizer settings to create a response curve more Crossover” (page 41). appealing to your personal taste. Setting item: X-Over Setting item: Parametric EQ 1 Touch [Channel] to select the channel. Each time you touch, the channel switches. 1 Adjust the Parametric EQ to your preference.

• The channel being adjusted is displayed in red. Adjusting the Band Front HPF Rear HPF SubW. LPF Touch [Band] to select the band to be adjusted. Band1 Band2 ··· Band8 Band9 2 Adjust the crossover to your preference. • You can select a band directly by touching the screen. Selecting the Cut-Off Frequency Touch [] or [] of “Freq.”, then select the cut-off Adjusting the Frequency frequency. Touch [] or [] of “Freq.” to adjust the frequency of the Setting contents: 20 / 25 / 31.5 / 40 / 50 / 63 / 80 (Initial setting) / selected band. 100 / 125 / 160 / 200 Hz Adjustable frequency Bands: 20 Hz to 20 kHz (in 1/3 octave steps) Adjusting the Slope Band1: 20 Hz~100 Hz (63 Hz) Touch [] or [] of “Slope”, then adjust the HPF or LPF Band2: 63 Hz~315 Hz (125 Hz) slope. Band3: 125 Hz~500Hz (250 Hz) Setting contents: 0 (Initial setting) / 6 / 12 / 18 / 24 dB/oct Band4: 250 Hz~1 kHz (500Hz) Band5: 500 Hz~2 kHz (1 kHz) Adjusting the Level Band6: 1 kHz~4 kHz (2 kHz) Touch [] or [] of “Level”, then adjust the HPF or LPF Band7: 2 kHz~7.2 kHz (4 kHz) level. Band8: 5.8 kHz~12 kHz (8 kHz) Band9: 9 kHz~20 kHz (16 kHz) Setting contents: -12 to 0 dB (Initial setting: 0)

3 Repeat steps 1 to 2 to make adjustment to the other Adjusting the Level channels. Touch [] or [] of “Level” to adjust the level of selected band. 4 To store the adjusted setting value, touch and hold [Preset1], [Preset2], or [Preset3] for at least 2 Setting contents: -7 to +7 (Initial setting: 0) seconds. Setting the Bandwidth • Touch [Flat] to initialize all values. Touch [] or [] of “Q Adjust” to select the bandwidth. • If the Rear Speaker setting is “Off,” the Rear Speaker setting cannot be edited (Refer to page 39). Setting contents: 1 (Initial setting) / 2 / 3 • If the Subwoofer setting is “Off,” the Subwoofer setting cannot be edited (Refer to page 39). 2 To adjust another band, repeat step 1, and adjust all • While adjusting the X-Over you should consider the frequency bands. response of the connected speakers. 3 To store the adjusted setting value, touch and hold Calling the X-Over adjusted value [Preset1], [Preset2], or [Preset3] for at least 2 Calling the pre-set X-Over adjusted value. seconds. Touch [Preset1], [Preset2], or [Preset3] on the X- Over screen. The setting stored in the Preset will be recalled.

38-EN • Settings exceeding the frequency of adjacent bands are not available. • While adjusting the Parametric EQ, you should consider the Setting the Subwoofer Phase frequency response of the connected speakers. • When the parametric EQ is adjusted, the adjustment for EQ Presets The subwoofer output phase is toggled Subwoofer Normal (0°) or becomes ineffective. Subwoofer Reverse (180°). • When EQ Presets is set, the interlinked Parametric EQ settings are Setting item: Subwoofer Phase also changed. Band2 of Parametric EQ is also interlinked with the Setting contents: 0° / 180° (Initial setting: 0°) Bass adjusted setting value, and Band8 is interlinked with the Treble adjusted setting value. We recommend storing Parametric EQ • If the Subwoofer setting is “Off,” the setting cannot be set. settings in the Preset in advance. • Touch [Flat] to initialize all values. • The Parametric EQ setting can be configured when Defeat is “Off.” Setting Defeat Calling the Parametric EQ adjusted value [Defeat] is selected on the Sound setup menu in step 3. Refer to “Sound Calling the pre-set Parametric EQ adjusted value. Setup Operation” (page 34). Touch [Preset1], [Preset2], or [Preset3] on the Parametric EQ screen. Setting item: Defeat Setting content: Off (Initial setting) / On The setting stored in the Preset will be recalled. • When Defeat is set to “ON,” the Car Specific Sound Setup/MX (Media Xpander)/EQ Presets/Parametric EQ switch cannot be Other Setting selected. • Defeat is changed to “Off” if you set BASS ENGINE SQ of Quick Sound Setting to “ON.” [Other] is selected on the Sound setup menu in step 3. Refer to “Sound Setup Operation” (page 34).

Volume Setting

You can change the volume of the sound heard when a button is touched.

Setting item: Volume Key Sound Feedback Setting contents: 0 to 7 (Initial setting: 5)

Setting the Volume for Each Source

The volume level for each source can be adjusted.

Setting item: Source Volume Setup Radio / DVD / CD / Compressed Media / iPod Music / iPod Video / Pandora / AUX / Bluetooth Audio*1 / SiriusXM*2 Setting contents: -14 to +14 (Initial setting: 0) *1 Bluetooth Pandora correspond to Bluetooth Audio. *2 INE-W960/INE-NAV-60 only. • Settable source differ depending on the connected device and settings.

Rear Speaker Setting

You can set the rear speaker output to “Off.”

Setting item: Rear Speaker Setting contents: On (Initial setting) / Off

Turning Subwoofer On/Off

If an optional subwoofer is connected to the unit, make the following setting.

Setting item: Subwoofer Setting contents: On / Off (Initial setting)

39-EN These values are the time correction values for the different speakers. Setting these values to make each sound reach the About Time Correction listening position at the same time as the sound of other speakers.

The distance between the listener and the speakers in a car vary widely Time Correction Value List due to the complex speaker placement. This difference in the distances Time Time Distance Distance Distance Distance Difference Difference from the speakers to the listener creates a shift in the sounds image and (cm) (inch) (cm) (inch) frequency characteristics. This is caused by the time delay between the (msec) (msec) sound reaching the listener’s right versus the left ear. 0.0 0.0 0.0 5.1 173.4 68.3 To correct this, this unit is able to delay the audio signal to the speakers 0.1 3.4 1.3 5.2 176.8 69.7 closest to the listener. This effectively creates a perception of increased distance for those speakers. The listener can be placed at an equal 0.2 6.8 2.7 5.3 180.2 71.0 distance between the left and right speakers for optimum staging. 0.3 10.2 4.0 5.4 183.6 72.4 The adjustment will be made for each speaker in 3.4cm steps. 0.4 13.6 5.4 5.5 187.0 73.7 Example 1. Listening Position: Front Left Seat 0.5 17.0 6.7 5.6 190.4 75.0 0.6 20.4 8.0 5.7 193.8 76.4 Adjust the time correction level of the front left speaker to a high value 0.7 23.8 9.4 5.8 197.2 77.7 and the rear right to zero or a low value. 0.8 27.2 10.7 5.9 200.6 79.1 0.9 30.6 12.1 6.0 204.0 80.4 1.0 34.0 13.4 6.1 207.4 81.7 1.1 37.4 14.7 6.2 210.8 83.1 1.2 40.8 16.1 6.3 214.2 84.4 1.3 44.2 17.4 6.4 217.6 85.8

5.1ms 1.4 47.6 18.8 6.5 221.0 87.1 1.5 51.0 20.1 6.6 224.4 88.4 0.5m 1.6 54.4 21.4 6.7 227.8 89.8 2.25m 1.7 57.8 22.8 6.8 231.2 91.1 1.8 61.2 24.1 6.9 234.6 92.5 1.9 64.6 25.5 7.0 238.0 93.8 2.0 68.0 26.8 7.1 241.4 95.1 2.1 71.4 28.1 7.2 244.8 96.5 2.2 74.8 29.5 7.3 248.2 97.8 The sound is not balanced because the distance between the 2.3 78.2 30.8 7.4 251.6 99.2 listening position and the various speakers is different. 2.4 81.6 32.2 7.5 255.0 100.5 The difference in distance between the front left speaker and the rear 2.5 85.0 33.5 7.6 258.4 101.8 right speaker is 1.75 m (68-7/8"). Here we calculate the time correction value for the front left speaker 2.6 88.4 34.8 7.7 261.8 103.2 in the diagram on the above. 2.7 91.8 36.2 7.8 265.2 104.5 Conditions: 2.8 95.2 37.5 7.9 268.6 105.9 Farthest Speaker – listening position : 2.25 m (88-9/16") 2.9 98.6 38.9 8.0 272.0 107.2 Front left speaker – listening position : 0.5 m (19-11/16") Calculation: L = 2.25 m – 0.5 m = 1.75 m (68-7/8") 3.0 102.0 40.2 8.1 275.4 108.5 1 Time correction = 1.75 ÷ 343* × 1000 = 5.1 (ms) 3.1 105.4 41.5 8.2 278.8 109.9 1 * Speed of sound: 343 m/s (765 mph) at 20°C 3.2 108.8 42.9 8.3 282.2 111.2 In other words, giving the front left speaker a time correction value of 3.3 112.2 44.2 8.4 285.6 112.6 5.1 ms makes it seem as if its distance from the listener is the same 3.4 115.6 45.6 8.5 289.0 113.9 as the distance to the farthest speaker. 3.5 119.0 46.9 8.6 292.4 115.2 Time correction eliminates the differences in the time required for the 3.6 122.4 48.2 8.7 295.8 116.6 sound to reach the listening position. The time of the front left speaker is corrected by 5.1 ms so that its 3.7 125.8 49.6 8.8 299.2 117.9 sound reaches the listening position at the same time as the sound of 3.8 129.2 50.9 8.9 302.6 119.3 other speakers. 3.9 132.6 52.3 9.0 306.0 120.6 Example 2. Listening Position: All Seats 4.0 136.0 53.6 9.1 309.4 121.9 4.1 139.4 54.9 9.2 312.8 123.3 Adjust the time correction level of each speaker to almost the same level. 4.2 142.8 56.3 9.3 316.2 124.6 1 Sit in the listening position (driver’s seat, etc.) and 4.3 146.2 57.6 9.4 319.6 126.0 measure the distance (in meters) between your head 4.4 149.6 59.0 9.5 323.0 127.3 and the various speakers. 4.5 153.0 60.3 9.6 326.4 128.6 4.6 156.4 61.6 9.7 329.8 130.0 2 Calculate the difference between the distance correction value to the farthest speaker and the 4.7 159.8 63.0 9.8 333.2 131.3 other speakers. 4.8 163.2 64.3 9.9 336.6 132.7 4.9 166.6 65.7 L = (distance to farthest speaker) – (distance to other speakers) 5.0 170.0 67.0

40-EN About the Crossover Source Setup

Crossover (X-Over): This unit is equipped with an active crossover. The crossover limits the frequencies delivered to the outputs. Each channel is controlled Source Setup Operation independently. Thus, each speaker pair can be driven by the frequencies for which they have been optimally designed. The crossover adjusts the HPF (high pass filter) or LPF (low pass filter) To display the Source Setup Menu screen: of each band, and also the slope (how fast the filter rolls off the highs or Your vehicle must be parked with the ignition key in the ACC or lows). ON position. To do this, follow the procedures below. Adjustments should be made according to the reproduction 1 Bring your vehicle to a complete stop at a safe characteristics of the speakers. Depending on the speakers, a passive location. Engage the parking brake. network may not be necessary. If you are unsure about this point, please 2 Release the parking brake (for your safety, operate consult your authorized Alpine dealer. while depressing the foot brake pedal). 3 Engage the parking brake again. Cut-off frequency Slope • For automatic transmission vehicles, place the transmission lever (1/3 octave steps) Level in the Park position. HPF LPF HPF LPF Now, the locking system for the Source mode operation has been FLAT, –6, Subwoofer 20 Hz - 0 to released. Engaging the parking brake can reactivate the Source ------–12, –18, (LPF) 200 Hz –12 dB Setup Menu, as long as the car’s ignition has not been turned off. –24 dB/oct. It is not necessary to repeat the above procedure FLAT, –6, (1 through 3) of “To display the Source mode screen.” Rear 20 Hz - 0 to speaker ---- –12, –18, ---- Each time the ignition is turned OFF, perform the procedure of “To 200 Hz –12 dB (HPF) –24 dB/oct. display the Source mode screen.” FLAT, –6, Front 20 Hz - 0 to speaker ---- –12, –18, ---- 200 Hz –12 dB (HPF) –24 dB/oct. The following steps 1 to 5 are common operations to each “Setting item” of Source Setup. Refer to each section for details. Low range High range Slope adjusting 1 Touch [Setup] icon of Top banner. The Setup main screen is displayed. Output frequency Output frequency range range Subwoofer Rear speaker 2 Touch [ (Source)]. Slope The Source Setup screen appears. FLAT Level Front speaker 3 Select the desired item. adjusting (0 to –12 dB)

20 Hz 200 Hz (Different from actual HPF cut-off display) LPF cut-off frequency frequency

• HPF (high pass filter): Cuts the lower frequencies and allows the higher frequencies to pass. • LPF (low pass filter): Cuts the higher frequencies and allows the lower frequencies to pass. Setting items: Disc / Radio / SiriusXM / Auxiliary (AUX) / • Slope: The level change (in dB) for a frequency change of one octave. App Connection Method / • The higher the slope value, the steeper the slope becomes. Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) • Adjust the slope to FLAT to bypass the HP or LP filters. • Do not use a tweeter without the HPF on or set to a low frequency, as it may cause damage to the speaker due to the low frequency content. 4 Touch [] or [] etc., to change its setting. • Adjustment should be made according to the recommended crossover • When the pop-up window for setup is displayed, touch [] to frequency of the connected speakers. Determine the recommended close the window after setting. crossover frequency of the speakers. Adjusting to a frequency range outside that recommended may cause damage to the speakers. 5 Touch [] to return to the previous screen. For the recommended crossover frequencies of Alpine speakers, refer • Immediately after changing the Source Setup (while the system is to the respective Owner’s Manual. writing data automatically) do not turn the ignition key to OFF. We are not responsible for damage or malfunction of speakers caused Otherwise, the settings may not be changed. by using the crossover outside the recommended value.

41-EN To play in a language other than those displayed Disc Setting 1 Touch [DVD Menu Language Code], [Audio Language Code] or [Subtitle Language Code]. [Disc] is selected on the Source setup menu in step 3. Refer to “Source The numeric keypad screen is displayed. Setup Operation” (page 41). 2 Touch the 4-digit numeral of the language number. To reference language numbers, refer to “List of • You can perform DVD setup in DVD video mode. Language Codes” (page 79). • Touch [Stop] before performing Disc setup. 3 Touch [OK] to memorize the number. • The setting content changes to “Other” if the desired language code Setting of the DVD Menu Language is input. Set the language used for the menus (title menu, etc.). Changing the Country Code Setting Setting item: DVD Menu Language Setting contents: AUTO (Initial setting) / EN / JA / DE / ES / FR / Set the country code of which you want to set the rating level (Parental IT / SV / RU / ZH lock). • When “AUTO” is selected, the primary menu language among the Setting item: Country Code recorded ones is played. Setting contents: Auto / Other • As for the language abbreviation, refer to “List of Language Codes” (page 79). Auto: The primary country code among those recorded is played. Other: The setting content changes to “Other” if the desired Setting of the Audio Language country code is input.

Set the audio language produced from the speakers. • If settings are changed, the old settings are overwritten. Make a note of the current settings before making changes. The settings will be Setting item: Audio Language cleared if the vehicle’s battery is disconnected. Setting contents: AUTO (Initial setting) / EN / JA / DE / ES / FR / IT / SV / RU / ZH 1 Touch [Country Code Input]. 2 Touch the 4-digit country code. • When “AUTO” is selected, the primary audio language among the recorded ones is applied. As for the country number, refer to “List of Country • As for the language abbreviation, refer to “List of Language Codes” Codes” (page 80). (page 79). 3 Touch [OK] to memorize the code.

Setting of the Subtitle Language Setting the Rating Level (Parental Lock)

Set the language of the subtitles displayed on the screen. This function can help limit the viewing of movies to children of appropriate age levels only. Setting item: Subtitle Language Setting contents: AUTO (Initial setting) / EN / JA / DE / ES / FR / Setting item: Parental Control IT / SV / RU / ZH • If settings are changed, the old settings are overwritten. Make a note • When “AUTO” is selected, the primary subtitle language among the of the current settings before making changes. The memory will be recorded ones is applied. cleared if the vehicle’s battery is disconnected. • As for the language abbreviation, refer to “List of Language Codes” • On unrated discs, playback will not be restricted even if the rating (page 79). level is set. • If you want to play back a disc with parental lock, and its use is currently restricted, change the rating level and the country number Changing the Language Setting in order to play back the disc. • Once set, this rating level remains in memory until changed. To The DVD menu language, audio language and subtitle language can be enable playback of discs of higher rating levels, or to cancel the set according to your preferences. parental lock, the setting must be changed. Once set, this becomes the default language. This function is convenient • Not all discs provide a parental lock. If you are unsure about a disc, if you always want to listen in English, for example. (The language play it first to confirm. Do not leave discs accessible to young setting is not effective on some discs. In this case, the default language children for whom you deem them inappropriate. is set at the factory.) 1 Touch [Parental Control]. • When the settings are changed, old settings are overwritten. Make a The numeric keypad screen is displayed. note of the current settings before making changes. 2 Touch the numeric keypad to input a 4-digit password. • To temporarily change the language of the current disc, either do so The initial number is 0000. Input number are displayed from the DVD menu or by using the operation described in the as “*”. section “Switching the Audio Tracks” (page 28). 3 Touch [OK] to memorize the number. • If the disc does not include the selected language, the disc’s default The Parental screen appears. language is set.

42-EN Set the rating level of PARENTAL 4:3 PAN-SCAN: Select this when connected to a conventional 4:3 size monitor. 4 Touch [Parental Control]. The picture will fill the entire TV screen. However, due to the 5 Touch [] on [] to turn “On". mismatch in aspect ratio, parts of the movie at the extreme left Select “Off” to cancel parental lock or if you do not want and right sides will not be visible (when playing a 16:9 size to set a rating level. movie). 6 Touch [] to return to the previous screen. 7 Touch [Parental Level] 8 Touch [] or [] to select the rating level (1 to 8). The smaller the number, the higher the restriction. 9 Touch [] to return to the previous screen.

Changing the password 1 Touch [Password Change]. The numeric keypad screen is displayed. 2 Touch the input screen to enter a new 4-digit password. 16:9 WIDE: • Keep a note of the number somewhere safe in case you should Select this when connected to a wide screen TV. This is the forget it. factory setting. 3 Touch [OK] to memorize the number. 4 Touch [] to return to the previous screen.

Changing the rating level temporarily Some discs may request that you change the rating level set in the default settings during playback. In this case, the message “Do you wish to change Parental level? [OK] [Cancel].” If this screen appears, change the level as follows: • To change parental level and play, touch [OK]. When [OK] is touched, the numeric keypad input screen is displayed. Input the 4-digit password you set in “Setting the Rating Level (Parental Lock),” then touch [OK]. • To play without changing the parental level, touch [Cancel]. Radio Setting (If [Cancel] is touched, playback will be at the parental level set in “Setting the Rating Level (Parental Lock).”) [Radio] is selected on the Source setup menu in step 3. Refer to “Source Setup Operation” (page 41).

Setting the TV Screen Mode Setting the TUNER (FM) Tone Quality Use the procedure described below to modify the output screen (Tuner Condition) according to the type of TV monitor (rear monitor) being used. This unit can set your preferred tone quality for FM radio source. If the rear monitor is not connected, the screen setting is 16:9. Setting item: FM Tuner Setting Setting item: TV Screen Setting contents: Normal (Initial setting) / HiFi / Stable Setting contents: 4:3LB / 4:3PS / 16:9 (Initial setting) Normal: Standard setting • For some discs, the picture may not be set to the selected screen size. HiFi: High-quality setting (For details, refer to the explanation on the disc’s jacket.) Stable: Control noise 4:3 LETTER BOX: Select this when connected to a conventional 4:3 size (normal • Noise may be more noticeable when HiFi is set, depending on the TV aspect ratio) monitor. There may be black stripes visible at reception status. In this case, the Normal setting is recommended. the top and bottom of the screen (when playing a 16:9 size movie). The width of these stripes will depend upon the original aspect ratio of the theatrical release of the movie.

43-EN AUX Setting SiriusXM Setting (INE-W960/INE-NAV-60 only) [Auxiliary (AUX)] is selected on the Source setup menu in step 3. Refer to “Source Setup Operation” (page 41). [SiriusXM] is selected on the Source setup menu in step 3. Refer to “Source Setup Operation” (page 41). Setting the AUX Mode

Connection with external input devices is available through the iPod Managing Artist, Song and Sports Team VIDEO connector. An optional adapter cable is required (standard RCA Alerts to 3.5ø mini-phono plug or 3.5ø to 3.5ø mini phono plug). You can also play back video connecting with an optional AV cable (4- The following operations can be performed to manage the stored Songs, pole mini AV plug to 3-RCA). Artists and Sports teams information. (To learn about how to store the information, refer to “Storing the Desired Song/Artist” on page 76 and Setting item: AUX In “Setting the Favorite Sports Team Alerts” on page 45.) Setting contents: iPod Video (Initial setting) / AUX Setting item: Alert Setup iPod Video: Set when connected to an iPod or iPhone. AUX: Set when connected to an external input device. Setting the Alert ON/OFF Individually for a Song/Artist/ Sport Team Usable 4-pole mini AV plug You can manage the stored Alert (Songs, Artists, Sports teams) The unit accepts the following 4-pole mini AV plug pin-out: individually by this setting.

Audio L (White) 1 Touch [Alert List]. Audio R (Red) The Alert List screen is displayed. Ground Video (Yellow)

• Please check pin-out carefully before use of this product. Depending on the cable, there may be no picture and/or sound.

Setting the Primary AUX Name (AUX 2 Touch [On] or [Off] of the desired song, artist or Setup) team. Set to ON if you want to receive this alert. When AUX In is set to “AUX”, this setting is available. Set to OFF if you do not want to receive this alert. Setting item: Primary Name • To delete the list, touch [Delete], and then touch [OK]. Setting contents: AUX (Initial setting) / DVD / GAME / EXT.DVD / DVD-CHG / TV Setting ON/OFF of all Songs/Artists/Games Alert Determines whether the received alert of all stored Songs/Artist/Games Switching the Visual Input Signal System is set or not. After setting to “AUX” in “Setting the AUX Mode,” this setting can be carried out. The video input type can be changed. 1 Touch [Alert]. Setting item: Signal Setting contents: Auto (Initial setting) / NTSC / PAL 2 Touch [] or [] of “Alert” to select On/Off. Off: No alert. Auto: The video input signal type (NTSC or PAL) will be automatically selected. On: Alert is enabled. NTSC/PAL: Choose the video input signal type manually.

44-EN Setting all Source Alert Setting the Parental Lock You can enable Alert even on sources other than SiriusXM. You can lock out channels with passcode protection. Channels that are [Alert] 1 Touch . locked cannot be accessed without entering the passcode. You can unlock a channel or change the passcode using this menu option. 2 Touch [All Source]. Off: Alert is enabled only on SiriusXM. Setting item: Parental Lock On: Alert is enabled even on sources other than SiriusXM. 1 Touch [Parental Lock]. The numeric keypad screen is displayed. Deleting all stored Alert The operation will delete all stored songs, artists and teams alert 2 Touch the numeric keypad to input a 4-digit information. passcode. The initial number is 0000. 1 Touch [Delete All]. Input number are displayed as “*” (asterisk). A message is displayed. 3 Touch [OK]. 2 Touch [Yes] to clear the information of all stored Or touch [] to cancel entry of the passcode or touch Artist, Song, and Game alert items. [Delete All] to erase the digits that you have entered so you Touch [No] to cancel. can start over or touch [] to erase the last digit that you entered. Setting the Favorite Sports Team Alerts After the correct passcode is entered, the Parental Lock options menu is displayed. This menu option allows you to select your favorite teams, organized by Unlocking all Channels leagues, so that you will be alerted later when your favorite teams are playing on other channels. 4 Touch [Clear All Locked Channels]. Setting item: Game Alert Setup 5 Touch [OK] to clear the lock of all the locked 1 Touch [Game Alert Setup]. channels. The Game Alert Setup screen is displayed. Touch [Cancel] to cancel.

2 Select the desired league. Setting the Lock status of individual channels The display changes to the team list of the selected league. 4 Touch [Locked Channels]. 3 Touch your favorite team name. The channel list screen is displayed. A “Team Saved X Used/Y Empty” pop up screen is displayed. 5 Select the desired channel. X is the total number of song titles, artist names or sports team stored in memory, and Y is the total number of memory 6 Touch [] or [] to select On/Off. song titles, artist names or sports teams still available for storage. 7 Touch [] to return to the previous screen. • Teams that you have selected will be indicated with an asterisk “*”. • If the memory is full, you cannot select a new team. To add another team alert, you need to delete a selected one first. Touch [Delete] for the team (with “*” mark) that you want to delete. A message will be displayed. Touch [Yes] to delete it and touch [No] to cancel. You can also delete a team from the Alert list, for details, refer to “Managing Artist, Song and Sports Team Alerts” on page 44.

45-EN Changing the Lock Passcode Setting the App connection method 4 Touch [Edit Code]. The numeric keypad screen is displayed. [App connection method] is selected on the Source setup menu in step3. Refer to “Source Setup Operation” (page 41). Use the keypad to enter the current (old) 4-digit 5 Set ALPINE APP to USB when an iPhone is connected, or set to passcode. BLUETOOTH when a Smartphone (Android OS or BlackBerry OS) is (The initial passcode is set to 0000). paired. Touch [Enter] to confirm the entry. Touch [Delete All] to erase all of the digits that you entered. Setting item: App Connection Method Touch [] to erase the last digit you entered. Setting contents: None / USB (iPhone) (Initial setting) / Touch [] to abort changing the passcode. Bluetooth (Android) None: No Smartphone is connected. 6 Now use the keypad to enter the new 4-digit USB (iPhone): When an iPhone is connected to INE-W960/ passcode. INE-NAV-60/INE-W960S’s USB port, you can enjoy Pandora, program the unit’s sound 7 Touch [OK]. tuning parameters, or communicate with SNS. Bluetooth Set this when a Smartphone (Android OS or 8 Then use the keypad to enter the new 4-digit (Android): BlackBerry OS) is paired with this unit via passcode a second time to verify it. BLUETOOTH technology. At this time, you can enjoy Pandora, program the unit’s sound • Remember to keep a note of the passcode in a safe place in case you tuning parameters, or communicate with SNS. forget the code. • After the above setting, turn the ignition key off (ACC OFF) and on again (ACC ON). Signal Strength Information • For this function to work properly, specific applications must be installed on your Smartphone before connection. Consult your While listening to a SiriusXM Channel, the Signal strength of the Alpine dealer or the Alpine website for details. current channel will be displayed. • Only the iPhone and certain Android Smartphones support this Setting item: Signal Indicator function. This menu item displays the SiriusXM signal strength as Strong, Good, Weak or No Signal. Rear Seat Entertainment Setting • If the Signal Indicator reports Weak or No Signal and your vehicle is parked outside with no obstructions to the southern sky, then your [Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)] is selected on the Source setup SiriusXM antenna may not be properly installed or may have become damaged. menu in step 3. Refer to “Source Setup Operation” (page 41).

Setting the Rear Seat Entertainment System

Video can be output to the rear monitor.

Setting item: Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) Setting contents: Off (Initial setting) / On

46-EN BLUETOOTH Setup Displaying BLUETOOTH Information

The BLUETOOTH function is always available on this unit. [Bluetooth Information] is selected on the BLUETOOTH setup menu You can, therefore, search for a BLUETOOTH device for pairing at any in step 3. Refer to “BLUETOOTH Setup Operation” (page 47). time. You can display the BLUETOOTH device name and device address of this unit.

Setting item: Bluetooth Information BLUETOOTH Setup Operation Registering the BLUETOOTH Device To display the BLUETOOTH Setup Menu screen: Your vehicle must be parked with the ignition key in the ACC or [Set Bluetooth Device] is selected on the BLUETOOTH setup menu in ON position. To do this, follow the procedures below. step 3. Refer to “BLUETOOTH Setup Operation” (page 47). 1 Bring your vehicle to a complete stop at a safe The BLUETOOTH device is used when a connectable BLUETOOTH location. Engage the parking brake. compatible device is searched and connected from this unit, or a new 2 Release the parking brake (for your safety, operate BLUETOOTH compatible device is registered. while depressing the foot brake pedal). 3 Engage the parking brake again. 1 Touch [Set Bluetooth Device]. • For automatic transmission vehicles, place the transmission lever 2 Touch [Search] of “No Device.” in the Park position. Now, the locking system for the BLUETOOTH mode operation has 3 Touch [Audio], [Hands-free] or [Both] of the been released. Engaging the parking brake can reactivate the device you want to connect from the list. BLUETOOTH Setup Menu, as long as the car’s ignition has not Audio: Sets for use as an Audio device been turned off. It is not necessary to repeat the above procedure (1 through 3) of “To display the BLUETOOTH mode screen.” Hands-free: Sets for use as a Hands Free Device. Each time the ignition is turned OFF, perform the procedure of “To Both: Sets for use as both an Audio device and Hands display the BLUETOOTH mode screen.” Free Device. • You can register up to 3 BLUETOOTH compatible mobile phones. The following steps 1 to 5 are common operations to each “Setting item” of BLUETOOTH Setup. Refer to each section for 4 When the device registration is complete, a message details. appears and the device returns to normal mode. • The BLUETOOTH registration process differs depending on the 1 Touch [Setup] icon of Top banner. device version and SSP (Simple Secure Pairing). If a 4 or 6 character The Setup main screen is displayed. Passcode appears on this device, enter the Passcode using the BLUETOOTH compatible device. 2 Touch [ (BLUETOOTH)]. If a 6 character Passkey appears on this device, make sure the same The BLUETOOTH Setup screen appears. passkey is displayed on the BLUETOOTH compatible device and touch “Yes.” 3 Select the desired item. • If all the 3 devices have been registered, you cannot register the 4th device. To register another device, you need to delete one of the devices from position 1 to 3 first.

Setting the BLUETOOTH Device Select one of 3 paired BLUETOOTH compatible devices that you previously registered.

1 Touch [Set Bluetooth Device]. 2 Touch [Audio] or [Hands-free] of the device you want to connect from the Paired Device list. Setting items: Bluetooth Information / Set Bluetooth Device / Passcode Change / Phone Speaker / Caller Volume / Microphone Level / Ring Tone Volume / Delete Call History / Contact List Order

4 Touch [] or [] etc., to change its setting. • When the pop-up window for setup is displayed, touch [] to close the window after setting.

5 Touch [] to return to the previous screen. • Immediately after changing the BLUETOOTH Setup (while the system is writing data automatically) do not turn the ignition key to OFF. Otherwise, the settings may not be changed.

47-EN Deleting a BLUETOOTH Device from the list You can delete the information of a previously connected Adjusting the Microphone Level BLUETOOTH compatible device. [Microphone Level] is selected on the BLUETOOTH setup menu in 1 Touch [Set Bluetooth Device]. step 3. Refer to “BLUETOOTH Setup Operation” (page 47). You can adjust the microphone level, during the call. 2 Touch [Delete] of the BLUETOOTH compatible device to delete from the Paired Device list. Setting item: Microphone Level Setting contents: 1 to 11 (Initial setting: 5) 3 Touch [OK]. • Touching [Cancel] will cancel the setting. Adjusting the Ring Tone Volume

[Ring Tone Volume] is selected on the BLUETOOTH setup menu in Setting the Passcode step 3. Refer to “BLUETOOTH Setup Operation” (page 47). You can adjust the volume of the incoming call. [Pass code Change] is selected on the BLUETOOTH setup menu in step 3. Refer to “BLUETOOTH Setup Operation” (page 47). Setting item: Ring Tone Volume Setting contents: 1 to 11 (Initial setting: 5) You can set the code for connecting with a BLUETOOTH compatible device. Setting item: Passcode Change Deleting All the Histories Touch [Passcode Change]. 1 [Delete Call History] is selected on the BLUETOOTH setup menu in A numeric keypad screen is displayed. step 3. Refer to “BLUETOOTH Setup Operation” (page 47). 2 Enter a 4-digit passcode, and then touch [Enter]. Dialled/Received/Missed Incoming histories are all deleted. Setting item: Delete Call History • The initial number is 0000. • For details on how to input the numeric keypad, refer to “Numeric Keypad Input Operations” (page 26). 1 Touch [Delete Call History] The confirmation screen is displayed. • When there is no history, this option is not available.

Selecting the Output Speaker 2 Touch [OK]. All the histories are deleted. [Phone Speaker] is selected on the BLUETOOTH setup menu in step 3. Refer to “BLUETOOTH Setup Operation” (page 47). You can select which speaker in the car will output the audio from the Changing the Phone book List Order phone.

Setting item: Phone Speaker [Contact List Order] is selected on the BLUETOOTH setup menu in Setting contents: ALL (Initial setting) / FRONT L / FRONT R / step 3. Refer to “BLUETOOTH Setup Operation” (page 47). FRONT LR The phone book is listed alphabetically according to the initial letter of ALL: The sound is output from all speakers in car. name. FRONT L: The sound is only output from the front left speaker. You can choose to arrange the phone book list order according to the FRONT R: The sound is only output from the front right initial letters of the First Name or Last Name. speaker. Setting item: Contact List Order FRONT LR: The sound is output from the front left and front Setting contents: First Name (Initial setting) / Last Name right speakers. • To reflect the setting, the phone book needs to be reload. For details • The setting cannot be adjusted during a phone call. Adjust the setting on phone book loading operations, refer to “Phone Book Function” before placing a call. (page 55).

Adjusting the Caller Volume

[Caller Volume] is selected on the BLUETOOTH setup menu in step 3. Refer to “BLUETOOTH Setup Operation” (page 47). You can adjust the receive volume, during the call.

Setting item: Caller Volume Setting contents: 1 to 11 (Initial setting: 5)

48-EN Camera Setup AUX Camera Setting

[Camera] is selected on the Camera setup menu in step 3. Camera Setup Operation Refer to “Camera Setup Operation” (page 49).

With an optional camera connected, its video is output to the monitor. Setting the Camera Input When the camera is connected, set this item. Setting item: Camera Select / Camera Signal */ Guide Adjustment * To display the Camera Setup Menu screen: Setting contents: Off (Initial setting) / Rear Your vehicle must be parked with the ignition key in the ACC or * If “Camera Select” is set to “Off,” this option is not available. ON position. To do this, follow the procedures below. 1 Bring your vehicle to a complete stop at a safe Setting the AUX Camera Signal Input location. Engage the parking brake. When the AUX camera is connected, the video input signal type can be 2 Release the parking brake (for your safety, operate chosen. while depressing the foot brake pedal). 3 Engage the parking brake again. Setting item: Camera Signal Setting contents: AUTO (Initial setting) / NTSC / PAL • For automatic transmission vehicles, place the transmission lever in the Park position. NTSC/PAL: Choose the video input signal type manually. AUTO: The suitable video input signal type will be Now, the locking system for the Camera mode operation has automatically chosen between NTSC and PAL. been released. Engaging the parking brake can reactivate the Camera Setup Menu, as long as the car’s ignition has not been Adjusting the Rear Camera Guide turned off. It is not necessary to repeat the above procedure (1 through 3) of “To display the Camera mode screen.” If you select “Rear” you can adjust the camera guide position. Each time the ignition is turned OFF, perform the procedure of “To display the Camera mode screen.” Setting item: Guide Adjustment 1 Touch [Guide Adjustment]. The following steps 1 to 5 are common operations to each The camera guide adjustment screen is displayed. “Setting item” of Camera Setup. Refer to each section for Touch the guide you intend to adjust. details. 2 Guide line can also be selected by touching [] [].

1 Touch [Setup] icon of Top banner. The Setup main screen is displayed.

2 Touch [ (Camera)]. The Camera Setup screen appears.

3 Select the desired item.

3 Touch [], [], [] or [] to adjust the position of the guide. • Touching [Clear] clears adjustments and returns to the setting before guide line alteration.

4 After the adjustment is completed, touch [Set].

Setting items: Camera / Camera Interrupt (Power OFF Mode)

4 Touch [] or [] etc., to change its setting. • When the pop-up window for setup is displayed, touch [] to close the window after setting.

5 Touch [] to return to the previous screen. • Immediately after changing the Camera Setup (while the system is writing data automatically) do not turn the ignition key to OFF. Otherwise, the settings may not be changed.

49-EN Adjusting guides simultaneously (for Rear camera only) Touch [Link]. About the Rear Camera Guide The 3 vertical guides of the currently-selected guide link together, allowing them to be adjusted simultaneously. To display the guide, set “Guide Display On/Off Setting” (page 50) to On. Also, to adjust the guide, refer to “Adjusting the Rear Camera Guide” (page 49). You can also turn off the guide in the Rear camera display screen.

Indication mark meaning When the car is put into reverse gear, the monitor switches to the rear view camera image. Guides appear to help visualize the car's width and distance from the rear bumper.

Turning guide display On/Off Turning the selected guide off.

1 Touch [On/Off]. The currently selected guide will turn off.

2 To turn the guide on, touch [On/Off] again. • Guides that are turned off are still adjustable.

Returning guides to default 1 Car width extension marks (red, yellow and green in 1 Touch [Default]. order of distance) A message window will appear. If properly calibrated, the marks indicate the car's width. This helps guide the car's path when backing up in a 2 Touch [OK]. straight line. Adjusted values will return to default settings. The marks represent the distance from the rear of the car (from the rear end of the bumper). Guide Display On/Off Setting • The marks do not move in synchronization with the steering wheel. Touch [Guide Off] on the Rear camera display 1 • Set the marks to suit the car’s width. screen. The guide disappears, and then the [Guide Off] switch 2 Distance guidance marks changes to [Guide On]. The marks represent the distance from the rear of the car (from the rear end of the bumper). 2 Touch [Guide On] to turn on the guide. • The marks do not move in synchronization with the steering wheel. Adjusting the Caution Display Location • We recommend that you measure the actual distance to Touch [Caution]. the marks when parked on a level surface. Depending on the condition of the car or road surface, the range of • For each touch, the caution location moves to the top or bottom of the • screen. vision may vary. • The camera has a limited range of vision. Objects at extreme angles to the camera (e.g. under the bumper or at opposite ends of the bumper) may not be in the its field-of-vision. Camera Interrupt Setting (Power OFF • The rear camera image may have a tint which is different from the actual surroundings. Mode) • Depending on the car, the guidance may deviate to the right or left. This is not a malfunction. [Camera Interrupt] is selected on the Camera setup menu in step 3. Refer to “Camera Setup Operation” (page 49). Distance guidance mark You can set whether to display the rear camera image when the gear The distance guides represent the ground level distance from the rear lever is moved to the reverse (R) position while the unit is power off. bumper. It is difficult to accurately estimate the distance to objects Setting item: Camera Interrupt (Power OFF Mode) above ground level. Setting contents: On / Off (Initial setting) In the following example, the distance to A is 0.5 m and the distance to On: The rear camera image is displayed B is 1 m. Off: The rear camera image is not displayed

50-EN The distance guidance mark represents the distance to a flat road surface. Therefore in the case of an upward slope behind the car, the distance guides are displayed closer to the rear bumper than the actual distance. For example, if there is an obstacle on the upward slope, it C may appear farther away than its actual position. B Also, an error may occur between the guidance and the A (about 0.5 m) actual path of the car on the road surface.

When there is a steep downward slope behind the car (example)

about 1 m

In the screen, according to the distance guidance marks, the truck seems to be parked about 1 m away (at the position B). In actual fact, however, if you reversed to position A, you would collide with the truck. In the screen, positions A, B and C seem to be located in order of proximity. However, in actual fact, the position A and C are the same distance, and B is farther away than positions A and C. • The car width extension mark represents the distance to the road surface. The distance to an object on the road is not accurately represented by the guides.

Error between the screen and the actual road surface In the following conditions, errors are produced between the screen Error Error guidance and the actual road surface. (The illustrations represent a case when the camera is installed in the standard position.) In the case of a downward slope behind the car, the When there is a steep upward slope behind the car distance guides are displayed farther from the rear (example) bumper than the actual distance. If there is an obstacle on the downward slope, it seems closer than its actual position. Also, an error may occur between the guidance and the actual path of the car on the road surface.

Distance guidance marks

Actual distances

Error Error

51-EN BLUETOOTH Before Using BLUETOOTH Before using the hands-free phone/audio function, the following settings need to be made. Operation Register a BLUETOOTH device in this unit (see page 47). • You can search for this unit using a BLUETOOTH compatible device, and then connect that BLUETOOTH compatible device to this unit. Setup Before Using The device name of this unit is “INE-W960/INE-NAV-60/INE- W960S” and the initial number of the passcode is “0000.” Also refer to the Owner’s Manual of the connected device(s). About BLUETOOTH

BLUETOOTH is a wireless technology allowing communication Hands-Free Phone Control between a mobile device or personal computer over short distances. This enables a hands-free call or data transmission between Display example for Phone menu screen BLUETOOTH compatible devices. BLUETOOTH transmission is available in the unlicensed 2.4 GHz spectrum if the distance between devices is within 10 meters. For details, refer to the BLUETOOTH website (http://www.bluetooth.com/).

• Depending on the BLUETOOTH version, a BLUETOOTH compatible device may not be able to communicate with this unit. • Proper function of this unit with all BLUETOOTH compatible devices is not guaranteed. For handling of the BLUETOOTH compatible device, consult your ALPINE dealer or ALPINE website. • Depending on the surroundings, BLUETOOTH wireless connection may be unstable. • When you place a call, or perform setup operations, be sure to stop your car in a safe place. • Depending on the connected BLUETOOTH compatible device(s), the BLUETOOTH devices Name function may differ. Also refer to the Owner’s Manual of the Favorites Display: Short Cut icon connected device(s). Dialled/Received/Missed Display: Each histories icon About the Hands-Free Phone

Hands-free calls are possible when using a HFP (Hands-Free Profile) Connecting a BLUETOOTH Device compatible mobile phone with this unit. Registering a BLUETOOTH device in INE-W960/INE-NAV-60/INE- • Avoid performing a hands-free call in heavy traffic or on narrow or winding streets. W960S enables automatic connection. • Close the windows while calling to reduce background noise. If it does not connect automatically, run through the connection • If both calling parties are using hands-free devices, or the call is procedure again. made in a noisy location, difficulty hearing the other person’s voice is normal. 1 Press the (Phone) button. • Depending on telephone line conditions or certain mobile devices The Phone menu screen is displayed. used, voices may sound unnatural. • When using a microphone, speak as directly as you can into the 2 Touch [Connect]. microphone to obtain the best sound quality. BLUETOOTH connection will start. • Certain mobile phone features are dependent on the capabilities and settings of your service provider’s network. Additionally, certain Disconnecting the BLUETOOTH features may not be activated by your service provider, and/or the Connection provider’s network settings may limit the feature’s functionality. Always contact your service provider about feature availability and Touch [Disconnect]. functionality. The BLUETOOTH connection is disconnected. All features, functionality, and other product specifications, as well as the information contained in the Owner’s Manual are based upon the latest available information and are believed to be accurate at the time of printing. Alpine reserves the right to change or modify any information or specifications without notice or obligation.

52-EN Changing the connecting BLUETOOTH Calling Device Use the Phone menu screen to make a phone call.

If multiple BLUETOOTH devices are registered in this device, you can change the connection among the registered devices. Using Short Cut Dialing to Make a Call

1 Press the (Phone) button. You can assign up to 4 phone numbers for one-touch dialing to make a The Phone menu screen is displayed. call easily. For how to assign one-touch dialing, refer to “Assigning as a Short Cut Dialing Number” (page 56). 2 Touch [Change Device]. The Set Bluetooth Device screen is displayed. 1 Press the (Phone) button. The phone menu screen is displayed. 3 Touch [Audio] or [Hands-free] of the selected device. 2 Touch [ Favorites]. The connection will transfer to the selected device. 3 Touch [Dial1], [Dial2], [Dial3] or [Dial4]. The phone call is sent to the stored number. Answering a Call • Pressing and holding [Dial1], [Dial2], [Dial3] or [Dial4] displays the Shortcut Dialing Edit screen. The only available editing Incoming calls are announced by the received call ring tone and a operation is deletion. displayed message (PHONE No., etc.). • If a name has been registered, the name is displayed on the shortcut button. 1 An incoming call triggers the ringtone and an incoming call display. Dialing a Number in Call History

2 Touch [] or press (Phone) button. You can use 3 types of history to make a phone call. Each history saves The call starts. up to 20 phone numbers. If the limit is exceeded, the oldest phone number is deleted. • During a call, the audio for the current mode on the unit is muted. After calling, playback will resume. Press the (Phone) button. • When the caller’s number is transmitted to the system, if the caller’s 1 The phone menu screen is displayed. name is stored in the phone book, the name is displayed. If the name is not stored, the number is displayed. 2 Touch [ Dialled], [ Received] or [ Missed]. Adjusting Ringtone Volume The last four histories are displayed.

The ringtone volume is adjustable on the incoming call message screen. To make a call by one of the last four histories Touch [] or [] for “Vol.” 3 Touch the icon you want to call. The phone call is started. Hanging up the Telephone To make a call by one of all the histories

Touch []. 3 Touch [All]. The call finishes. 4 Touch the name from the call history. The details screen of the call history is displayed.

5 Touch []. The phone call is started. • Touching [Delete] deletes the selected histories.

53-EN Dialing a Number in the Phone Book Voice Dial Function

You can use the phone book of the mobile phone to make a phone call. While connecting to a voice dial compatible hands-free phone, you can Before using, you need to transfer the phone book from the mobile make a telephone call by voice dial operation. phone to the system. For details on how to transfer the phone book, refer to “Synchronizing the Phone Book” (page 55). 1 Press and hold the (Phone) button for at least 3 seconds. 1 Press the (Phone) button. The phone menu screen is displayed.

2 Touch []. 3 Touch the person name or the telephone number from the Phone Book list.

4 Touch []. The phone call is started. The Voice Dial mode screen is activated. Entering a Phone Number to Make a Call 2 Say the telephone number* or name* you want to 1 Press the (Phone) button. call, into the microphone. The phone menu screen is displayed. * The number and name depend on the voice dial information stored in the mobile phone. Touch []. 2 To finish the Voice Dial mode, touch []. The number input screen appears. 3 • You can perform this operation only when a voice dial compatible 3 Enter the phone number you wish to call. mobile phone is connected. • You can input “+” by touching “0” repeatedly. • The Voice Dial function performance depends on the recognition • You can enter up to 31 digits. range of the mobile phone and mounting location of the microphone. Note when the microphone is mounted. 4 Touch []. • Voice dial operation depends on the function being available on the mobile phone. For details, refer to the owner’s manual of the mobile 5 Touch [Call]. phone. The phone call is started. • Depending on the mobile phone, the voice dial operation may finish automatically. Redial Function

You can redial the person you have previously called.

1 Press the (Phone) button. The phone menu screen is displayed.

2 Touch [Redial]. 3 Touch [Call]. The phone call is started.

54-EN Operations During a Conversation Phone Book Function

Display example Display example for Phone Book screen

Name, Phone number, Type* An icon is displayed to indicate that multiple phone * Depending on the model, Type may not be displayed. numbers are registered under an entry. Conversation time Synchronizing the Phone Book Adjusting the Speech Volume You can synchronize the system’s phone book with the mobile phone’s You can adjust the transmit volume and receive volume respectively. phone book. Touch [] or [] for “Vol.” Press the (Phone) button. :Microphone Level 1 The phone menu screen is displayed. :Caller Volume 2 Touch []. You can adjust the volume in 11 levels. Touch [] to turn down the volume. Touch [] to turn up the 3 Touch [Download]. volume.

Changing the Voice Output 4 Touch [SYNC]. Synchronization of the phone books starts. The voice output for calls is switchable between car speakers and the • You can store up to 1,000 phone numbers in the phone book. mobile phone speaker. • You can store up to 3 phone numbers by one person’s name. Touch []. • Depending on the mobile phone, this operation may not be possible. Adding the Phone Book

DTMF (Touch-Tone) Function 1 Press the (Phone) button. The phone menu screen is displayed. Transmits a DTMF (Touch-Tone) during a call. 2 Touch []. 1 Touch [Keypad]. The number input screen appears. 3 Touch [Download].

2 Input number. 4 Touch [Add]. Stays on standby for connection of the mobile phone. • You can transmit a Touch-Tone signal during a call. • Touch [Cancel] to cancel the standby mode.

Muting the Speech Volume 5 The mobile phone accesses this unit and then transfers the phone book from the mobile phone to You can temporarily lower the microphone level to 0. this unit. Touch [] during a conversation. During the mute mode, is highlighted. Touch [] again to cancel the mute mode.

55-EN Searching in the Phone Book Assigning as a Short Cut Dialing Number If there are 6 or more entries in the phone book you transferred, you can make a call using the phone book search function. Assigning from Call History

1 Press the (Phone) button. 1 Press the (Phone) button. The Phone menu screen is displayed. The Phone menu screen is displayed.

2 Touch []. 2 Touch [Dialled], [Received] or [Missed]. The Contact list screen is displayed. The last four histories are displayed.

3 Touch [Search]. 3 Touch [All]. The Keypad input screen is displayed. 4 Touch the person name you intend to assign as the 4 Input the first letter of an entry you want to search Short Cut dialing number. for. The details screen of the Call History is displayed. The number of targeted entries with the input first letter is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. To narrow 5 Touch [Preset]. down a search, input more letters. The details screen for the Short Cut is displayed. • After inputting characters, if the number of narrowed entries is 5 or less, the targeted entry list is displayed. 6 Touch [Save]. The phone number is assigned to the selected Short Cut 5 Touch [OK]. dialing number. The targeted entry of the Phone Book list is displayed. • If Dial1, Dial2, Dial3 or Dial4 is already registered, it is overwritten. 6 Touch the person name or the telephone number • Touch [Delete] to delete an assigned short cut dialing number. from the Phone Book list. Assigning from the Phone Book 7 Touch []. 1 Press the (Phone) button. The Phone menu screen is displayed. Deleting the Phone Book Entries 2 Touch []. Deleting One Entry from the Phone Book The Phone Book screen is displayed.

1 Press the (Phone) button. 3 Touch the phone number you intend to assign as the The Phone menu screen is displayed. Short Cut dialing number. The details screen of the Phone book is displayed. 2 Touch []. The Phone Book screen is displayed. 4 Touch [Preset]. The details screen for the Short Cut is displayed. 3 Touch [Delete]. The confirmation screen is displayed. 5 Touch [Save]. If multiple phone numbers are registered, they are all The phone number is assigned to the selected Short Cut deleted. dialing number. • If Dial1, Dial2, Dial3 or Dial4 is already registered, it is overwritten. Touch [OK]. 4 • Touch [Delete] to delete an assigned short cut dialing number. The selected number is deleted.

Deleting All Entries from the Phone Book

1 Press the (Phone) button. The Phone menu screen is displayed.

2 Touch []. The Phone Book screen is displayed.

3 Touch [All Delete]. The confirmation screen is displayed.

4 Touch [OK]. All entries of the phone book are deleted.

56-EN Call Waiting Function BLUETOOTH Audio

If a call comes in from another phone during a call, a notice is displayed If a BLUETOOTH compatible mobile phone, portable player, etc. is on the screen. This function can only be used if the connected mobile connected by wireless, you can play back a song (operation is phone has a call waiting function service included. controllable from the unit).

Receiving calls during a current call Display example for BLUETOOTH Audio main screen If a new call comes in during a current call, a screen allowing you to negotiate the new call is displayed.

Touch [<<], [>>] Touch [] to take the new call and put the current party on hold. Touch [] to not take the new call and continue your Song title call with the current party. Artist title Touch [] to end your call with the current call and Album title take the new call. Playing time BLUETOOTH devices Name Switching calls • The displayed onscreen buttons may differ depending on the AVRCP version. • Status Indicator/Song title/Artist title/Album title/Elapsed time do not display for AVRCP Ver. 1.0. • To play back audio, a mobile phone or a portable player conforming to A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile) or AVRCP (Audio/ Video Remote Control Profile) is required. Not all functions work with all devices. • During a call, sound on the BLUETOOTH audio source is muted. Compatible AVRCP versions: 1.0, 1.3, 1.4 • Available functions may differ depending on the AVRCP version.

Touch to switch the call. Playback • This unit supports only the Call Waiting function of a mobile phone. The second call function and three-way calling function of a mobile phone cannot be operated from this unit. Also the screen display may 1 Touch [Bluetooth-Audio] of Top banner. malfunction. 2 Touch [] or [] to select the desired track (file). Returning to the beginning of the current file: Touch [].

Fast backward the current file: Touch and hold [].

Advance to the beginning of the next file: Touch [].

Fast forward the current file: Touch and hold []. • The , buttons provide the same functions above.

3 To pause playback, touch [ / ].

57-EN Repeat Play

Available for AVRCP Ver. 1.3 and 1.4 only. Touch [] during playback. The repeat mode switches every time the button is touched.

(FILE)

(ALL)

(OFF)

• Operations may differ depending on the connected BLUETOOTH compatible device.

M.I.X. (Random Play)

Available for AVRCP Ver. 1.3 and 1.4 only. Touch [] during playback. The M.I.X. mode switches every time [] is touched.

(ALL)

(OFF)

• Operations may differ depending on the connected BLUETOOTH compatible device.

Search Function

Available for AVRCP Ver. 1.4 only. The displayed list differs with the connected BLUETOOTH device. Touch [ (Search)] of Bottom banner during playback. Select the track, etc., you want to listen to from the displayed list. • Operations may differ depending on the connected BLUETOOTH compatible device.

58-EN AUX Operation Screen Display During Video File Playback Auxiliary Device Touch the screen. The AUX operation screen is displayed.

(Optional) Example for AUX, DVD, Game mode display

Operating Auxiliary Devices (Optional)

To operate devices connected to the AUX terminals of INE-W960/INE- NAV-60/INE-W960S, follow the procedure described below.

• Set AUX In to “AUX.” Refer to “Setting the AUX Mode” (page 44). • Depending on the connected unit, the onscreen buttons may not work, or their operation may differ. • The operation screen changes to the visual screen in the AUX WARNING mode for 5 seconds after an operation has been performed. To It is dangerous (and illegal in many states) for the hide the AUX operation screen, touch the video display area. driver to watch TV/video while driving the vehicle. The Touch the display panel to display the operation screen driver may be distracted from looking ahead and an again. accident could occur. • Setting the AUX name for EXT.DVD, DVD-CHG and TV mode Install the INE-W960/INE-NAV-60/INE-W960S correctly displays their individual operation switches and enables operation. so that the driver cannot watch TV/video unless the Refer to “Setting the Primary AUX Name (AUX Setup)” (page 44). vehicle is stopped and the emergency brake is applied. If the INE-W960/INE-NAV-60/INE-W960S is not Operating an External DVD Player installed correctly, the driver will be able to watch TV/ To operate an External DVD player (Optional), set “Setting the Primary video while driving the vehicle and may be distracted AUX Name (AUX Setup)” (page 44) to “EXT.DVD.” from looking ahead and cause an accident. The driver or other people could be severely injured. Change to the External DVD Mode • If you try to activate the auxiliary device while driving, the display Touch [EXT.DVD] of Top banner. will show the warning-Picture off for your safety. The display shows the EXT. DVD mode screen. Touch [AUX]* of Top banner. The AUX mode screen is displayed. * The name which is given as the mode name in “Setting the Primary AUX Name (AUX Setup)” (page 44) is displayed.

59-EN Menu operation mode screen display example About the DVD Operation Screen

When the external DVD player playback screen is displayed, you can touch the screen to display the operation screen. For details on how to operate, refer to the Owner’s Manual of the connected DVD player.

External DVD player display example

[Key] The menu operation mode will be displayed. [], [] Touch [<<], [>>] Moves key panel location. [] Closes menu operation mode. [] Closes key panel. [], [], [], [] []* Moves menu cursor. Touch the switch to go back to the beginning of the current [Enter] chapter/track/file. Touch the switch once more to find the Determines the selected item. beginning of the previous chapter/track/file. Touch and hold [Return] to fast reverse. Returns to the previous item/screen. []* Touch the switch to advance to the beginning of the next chapter/track/file. Touch and hold to fast forward. [] Operating an External DVD Changer Starts/Stop M.I.X. play. [] To operate an External DVD changer (Optional), set “Setting the Starts/Stop repeat play. Primary AUX Name (AUX Setup)” (page 44) to “DVD-CHG.” [/] Switches between play and pause. Change to the External DVD Changer Mode [] Touch [DVD-CHG.] of Top banner. Touching during play initiates a pre stop. Touching again The display shows the DVD-CHG. mode screen. stops play. [Top Menu] Calls up the Top Menu screen. [Menu] Calls up the Menu screen. [Menu Control] Calls up the menu operation mode. [] Switches the program/playlist/folder down. [] Switches the program/playlist/folder up. [Angle] Switches angle. [Audio] Switches audio. [Subtitle] Switches sub titles. * The , buttons provide the same functions above.

60-EN About the DVD Changer Operation Screen Operating a TV When the External DVD changer playback screen is displayed, you can touch the screen to display the operation screen. For details on how to To operate a TV Receiver (TV) (Optional), set “Setting the Primary operate, refer to the Owner’s Manual of the connected DVD changer. AUX Name (AUX Setup)” (page 44) to “TV.”

• The DVD-CHG. operation mode screen and the Menu operation mode screen are the same as the external DVD player operation Change to the TV Mode screen. Refer to “Operating an External DVD Player.” Touch [TV] of Top banner. External DVD changer display example 3/3 (Info The display shows the TV mode screen. mode) About the TV Operation Screen

When the TV playback screen is displayed, you can touch the screen to display the operation screen. For details on how to operate, refer to the Owner’s Manual of the connected TV.

Touch [<<], [>>]

[Disc1]-[Disc6] Selects a Disc.

[], []* Switches the Channel number / Preset channel / frequency down. [], []* Switches the Channel number / Preset channel / frequency up. [Tune] (Channel or Preset or Manual) Switches amongst Channel mode, Preset mode, and Manual mode. [Band] Switches the band. [A.Memo] The tuner automatically seeks and stores stations. * The , buttons provide the same functions above.

61-EN Applying TuneIt Facebook Notification Function • Depending on the paired Smartphone, the following functions may This unit’s sound tuning is programmable from a connected not be available even though the TuneIt version is updated. Smartphone. It is also possible to download specific parameters for When the smartphone connected to the unit receives new notifications certain vehicles from Alpine’s TuneIt database stored in the Cloud. from Facebook, the unit emits a notification sound or displays the Using the TuneIt App, customized parameters can also be uploaded for notification screen, according to the TuneIt App settings. others to share and rate. Through this unit, it is also possible to receive and respond to Display example of notification for the Audio/Visual information from Alpine’s Social Network Service (SNS) available screen through the connected Smartphone. The installed TuneIt App should be launched on the Smartphone before connection to the head unit. TuneIt, is downloadable from Apple’s App Store; the Android user can download it from Google Play. For details, consult your Alpine dealer.

• The application program and related specifications and data may be deleted or terminated without notice. • Some TuneIt functions may not be available if the Smartphone is not in a service area or receives no signal.

Launching TuneIt App. Poster’s name • If no operation is made within 5 seconds after displaying the Launch TuneIt App on the smartphone. notification screen or if you touch the Audio/Visual screen, the The Notification List icon on the Top banner of this unit becomes notification screen will disappear. effective and the indicator lights up. Checking the content of notification Notification List icon Touch the poster’s name on the notification screen or on the Notification List screen, to display the content of the notification.

Example of the Notification Details display

Indicator

• Before using these operations, set the App connection method to USB (iPhone) or Bluetooth (Android), depending on the connected Smartphone. For details, refer to “Setting the App connection method” (page 46). Content of notification • Using the TuneIt App, you can download the optimal BASS ENGINE SQ tuning data for your speaker system. • You cannot check the content of a notification while the car is moving.

62-EN Displaying the Notification List Touch the Notification List icon on the Top banner, or (List) of the notification display. Camera Operation Example of the Notification List display (Optional)

When an optional camera is connected, the view video of camera can be output to the monitor. Depending on your camera, please choose the camera type first. For details, refer to “Camera Setup” (page 49). Rear camera: If an HCE-C305R*/HCE-C300R*/HCE-C200R/HCE-C115/HCE- C105 camera is connected, when the vehicle is reversed, the rear camera view (guide marks for vehicle width and available distance) is displayed automatically on the screen of this unit. • If there are no notifications in the Notification List, “No Notifications.” is displayed. * When connecting to HCE-C305R/HCE-C300R, calibration must be performed. For details, refer to “Calibration” in the owner’s manual Other operations of HCE-C305R/HCE-C300R. TTS (Text To Speech) Start/Stop switch You can adjust the quality of the camera image. Like switch: Setting items: Brightness / Color / Contrast The Smartphone feeds back a “Like” to Facebook while the Refer to “Visual Setting” (page 32). received Wall Posts or Comments are played back by TTS (Text To Speech). • As of February, 2014, the TTS correspondence App of iOS is Rear Camera Operation chargeable, and the TTS non-correspondence App of iOS is distributed at no charge. Set “Rear” for “AUX Camera Setting” (page 49).

Checking Rear Camera view

Touch [] of Top banner. The Rear Camera view is displayed.

Caution telop

• Touch the screen to turn on the guide display. • Touch the Caution telop to change the location of Caution. • Press the / button to close the camera display screen.

Displaying the Rear View Video while the Car is in Reverse

1 Shift the gear lever to the reverse (R) position. The rear view image is displayed while the car remains in reverse.

2 If you shift the gear lever to a position other than reverse (R), the monitor returns to the previous screen. • Never depend solely on the camera when backing up. Always turn and look and only use the camera for additional assistance. • This function is effective when the reverse wire is properly connected.

63-EN About creating a tag information library USB Memory You can scan music files in a USB memory device and create a library of tag information in this unit. Library creation starts when the USB memory device is connected. The time it takes to create the library (Optional) depends on the number of files in the USB memory device, but it may take several minutes.

You can play back music files (MP3/WMA/AAC) and video files About operations during library creation (DivX® ) stored in a USB memory device on the internal player of this system. DivX® files stored in a USB memory device and protected by • “Tag Search” (page 65) does not work properly while a library is DRM (Digital Rights Management) cannot be played. being created. This section explains music operations only. Refer to the DivX® • The order in which songs are played during library creation may differ from the order in the USB memory device. operation section in “DVD” (page 24) for information on video.

• Some DivX files stored in a USB memory cannot be operated/played. • If the first file played is a music file, the mode will be the music play Playback mode. If the first file played is a video file, the mode will be the video play mode. 1 Touch [USB] of Top banner. Display example for the USB main screen The USB mode is activated and the display changes to the USB screen. Audio mode 2 Touch [] or [] or to select the desired track (file). Returning to the beginning of the current track (file): Touch []. Fast reverse : Touch and hold []. Advancing to the beginning of the next track (file) : Touch []. Fast forward : Touch and hold [].

Video mode • The , buttons provide the same functions above. 3 To pause playback, touch [ / ]. [] is displayed in the middle of the screen. Touch [/] again or touch [] in the middle of the screen to start playback. • Any file protected by DRM (Digital Rights Management) copy protection, cannot be played back on this unit. • The playback time may not be correctly displayed when a VBR (Variable Bit Rate) recorded file is played back. • If there is tag information, artist name/album name/track name is displayed. Touch [<<], [>>] • ID3 tag/WMA tag If an MP3/WMA/AAC file contains ID3 tag/WMA tag information, the ID3 tag/WMA tag information is displayed (e.g., song name, artist name, and album name). • Refer to “Display example for MP3/WMA/AAC main screen” • If the combined number of files/folders in the USB memory devices ® (page 21) and “Display example for DivX main screen” (page 24) reaches 10,000, the message “The system has reached its limit of for screen element explanations. recognizable files/folders from the USB device.” will be displayed. To • You can display artwork during USB playback. delete the message, remove the USB memory devices.

64-EN Repeat Play Random Play (Shuffle Songs)

Operation differs depending on whether the most recent song search This operation is available only if the most recent song search was a Tag was a Tag Search or a Folder/File Search. Search. Touch [] during playback. Touch [ (Search)] of Bottom banner during The repeat mode switches every time the button is touched. 1 playback. Folder/File Search mode: The Category List screen is displayed. Repeat Repeat Folder* (OFF) Repeat 2 Touch [Shuffle Songs]. The tracks (files) on the disc will be played back in a Tag Search mode: random sequence. Repeat (OFF) Repeat To cancel Random play, touch []. • All songs in the USB memory are played back in random sequence. Any one song does not play back again until all songs have been * Only files in a folder are repeatedly played back. played back. • If the Repeat Play mode is activated during M.I.X. playback, the M.I.X. mode will be canceled. Searching for a Desired Song

Random Play (M.I.X.) INE-W960/INE-NAV-60/INE-W960S can carry out 2 kinds of searches.

Operation differs depending on whether the most recent song search • For details on Video file search, refer to “Searching for a Desired Video File” (page 28). was a Tag Search or a Folder Search. Touch [ (Search)] of Bottom banner during Touch [] during playback. playback. The tracks (files) on the disc will be played back in a random sequence. The Category List screen is displayed. To cancel M.I.X. play, touch [].

Folder Search mode: M.I.X. Folder*1 (OFF) M.I.X. Folder*1

Tag Search mode: M.I.X. Songs*2 (OFF) M.I.X. Songs*2

*1 Only files in a folder are played back in random sequence. 2 * M.I.X. Songs randomly plays back songs within a selected category Tag Search (playlist, album, etc.). The songs within the category are played just once until all songs have been played. By using file tag information and keeping these songs organized in • If the M.I.X. mode is activated during Repeat playback, the Repeat playlists, this unit’s search functions will ease song searches in large Play mode will be canceled. libraries. • If you select a track by using the search mode, the M.I.X. play mode Each music category has its own individual hierarchy. Use the Playlists/ will be canceled. Artists/Albums/Songs/Genres/Composers search mode to narrow searches based on the table below.

Hierarchy 1 Hierarchy 2 Hierarchy 3 Hierarchy 4 Playlists Songs — — Artists Albums Songs — Albums Songs — — Songs — — — Genres Artists Albums Songs Composers Albums Songs —

65-EN For example: Searching by Artist name The following example explains how an ARTISTS search is performed. Direct Up/Down Function Another search mode can be used for the same operation, although the hierarchy differs. This operation is available only if the most recent song search was a Tag Search. Searching by artist name Playlist/Artist/Album/Genre/Composer can be easily changed. For example, if you listen to a song from a selected album, the album 1 Touch [Artists]. can be changed. The Artists search screen is displayed. Touch [] or [] to select the desired Playlist/Artist/ Select the desired artist. 2 Album/Genre/Composer. To Play Back the Artist Directly • If an album is selected from an artist search, the album can be 1 Touch [] of the artist’s name. searched. All songs of the selected artist are played back. • For details on icon display, refer to “Direct Up/Down switch icon:” (page 69). To Search for the Album of the Artist • If search selection mode is not activated, Direct Up/Down Function is not possible. 1 Touch the selected artist name. The Albums search screen of the selected artist is displayed. 2 Touch [] of the desired album’s name. Select the Desired Folder (Folder up/ All songs of the selected album are played back. down) To Search for a Song in the Album of the Artist This operation is available only if the most recent song search was a 1 Touch the desired artist’s name. Folder/File Search. All albums of the selected artist are displayed. If you listen to a file from a selected folder, the folder can be changed.

3 Touch the desired album’s name. Touch [] or [] to select the folder. All songs of the selected album are displayed. • During M.I.X. ALL playback, this operation is not possible. 4 Touch the desired song’s name. The selected song is played back. • For details on how to scroll through the list, refer to “Selecting an Item in a List” (page 17). • After selecting a file via a Tag search, touch [] on the main screen to display the search screen. The hierarchy level you selected last in the search mode is displayed.

File/Folder Name Search

1 Touch [Folders]. The folder name list screen is displayed.

Folder Name Search Mode

2 Touch [] of the desired folder. The first file in the selected folder is played back.

File Name Search Mode

2 Touch the desired folder name. The file name of the selected folder is displayed.

3 Touch the desired file name. The selected file is played back. • To return to the previous hierarchy, touch []. • For details on how to scroll through the list, refer to “Selecting an Item in a List” (page 17). • After selecting a folder via a Folder name search, touch [] on the main screen to display the folder search screen. • After selecting a file via a File name search, touch [] on the main screen to display the file search screen.

66-EN Display example for iPod/iPhone main screen (Info iPod/iPhone mode) Audio mode (Optional)

A separately sold USB iPod/iPhone AV cable (KCU-461iV) or a separately sold Lightning to USB cable (KCU-471i) is required depending on the type of iPod/iPhone. When the INE-W960/INE-NAV-60/INE-W960S is connected by the above cable, the controls on the iPod are disabled.

• An iPod/iPhone with the Lightning connector does not support iPod video playback on the unit. • Internet or telephone functions, etc., of the iPhone or iPod touch are not controllable from the unit, but these functions can be controlled Video mode using the iPhone or iPod touch itself. • To watch the video screen of the file in the iPod/iPhone, the parking brake must be engaged. • For automatic transmission vehicles, place the transmission lever in the Park position.

About iPod/iPhone models usable with this unit • The following devices have been tested and shown to work with this unit. Correct function of earlier versions cannot be guaranteed. iPod touch 5th generation 16GB/32GB/64GB: Ver.7.0.4 iPod touch 4th generation 8GB/32GB/64GB: Ver.6.1.3 Song title/Episode title* iPod touch 3rd generation 32GB/64GB: Ver.5.1.1 Artist title/Release Date* iPod touch 2nd generation 8GB/16GB/32GB: Ver.4.2.1 Album title/Podcast title* iPod nano 7th generation 16GB: Ver.1.0.2 Current song no./Total song no. iPod nano 6th generation 8GB/16GB: Ver.1.2 Playing time iPod nano 5th generation (video camera) 8GB/16GB: Ver.1.0.2 iPod nano 4th generation(video) 8GB/16GB: Ver.1.0.4 Artwork display iPod nano 3rd generation(video) 4GB/8GB: Ver.1.1.3 * Podcast mode

• The following devices have been tested and shown to work The iPod/iPhone operation screen display during video with this unit. Correct function of earlier versions cannot be file playback guaranteed. iPhone5S 16GB/32GB/64GB: Ver.7.1.1 Touch the screen while the iPod/iPhone playback screen iPhone5C 16GB/32GB: Ver.7.1.1 is displayed. iPhone5 16GB/32GB/64GB: Ver.7.1.1 The iPod/iPhone operation screen is displayed. iPhone 4S 16GB/32GB/64GB: Ver.7.1.1 iPhone 4 16GB/32GB: Ver.7.1.1 • The operation screen changes to the visual screen in the iPod mode iPhone 3GS 8GB/16GB/32GB: Ver.6.1.6 for 5 seconds after an operation has been performed. iPhone 3G 8GB/16GB: Ver.4.2.1 • For clarity in identifying your model of iPod, please see Apple’s own document “Identifying iPod models” at http://support.apple.com/kb/HT1353.

WARNING It is dangerous for the driver to watch video while driving the vehicle. The driver may be distracted from looking ahead and an accident could occur. Install the INE-W960/INE-NAV-60/INE-W960S correctly so that the driver cannot watch Video unless the vehicle is stopped and the emergency brake is applied. If the INE-W960/INE-NAV-60/INE-W960S is not installed correctly, the driver will be able to watch the Video while driving the vehicle and may be distracted from looking ahead causing an accident. The driver or other people could be severely injured.

67-EN Searching by artist name Playback 1 Touch [ (Search)] of Bottom banner during playback. 1 Touch [iPod (Audio or Video)] of Top banner. The Search screen is displayed. The display shows the iPod mode screen.

2 Touch [] or [] or to select the desired track (file). Returning to the beginning of the current track (file): Touch []. Fast reverse : Touch and hold []. Advancing to the beginning of the next track (file) : Touch []. Fast forward : Touch and hold []. 2 Touch [Artists]. The Artists search screen is displayed. 3 To pause playback, touch [ / ]. Select the desired artist. • If a song is playing on the iPod/iPhone when it is connected to the 3 INE-W960/INE-NAV-60/INE-W960S, it will continue playing after To Play Back the Artist Directly the connection. • If the artist, album or song name, created in iTunes, has too many 1 Touch [] of the artist’s name. characters, songs may not be played back when connected to the All songs of the selected artist are played back. INE-W960/INE-NAV-60/INE-W960S. Therefore, a maximum of 64 characters is recommended. The maximum number of characters for To Search for the Album of the Artist the unit is 64. 1 Touch the selected artist name. • Some characters may not be correctly displayed. The Albums search screen of the selected artist is • The , buttons provide the same functions above. displayed. 2 Touch [] of the desired album’s name. All songs of the selected album are played back. Searching for a Music File To Search for a Song in the Album of the Artist An iPod/iPhone can contain thousands of songs. For this reason, this 1 Touch the desired artist’s name. unit can make various searches using the search function as shown All albums of the selected artist are displayed. below. Using the Playlist/Artist/Album/Podcast/Audiobook/Genre/Composer/ 4 Touch the desired album’s name. Song search mode’s individual hierarchy, you can narrow down your All songs of the selected album are displayed. search as shown in the table below. 5 Touch the desired song’s name. The selected song is played back. Hierarchy 1 Hierarchy 2 Hierarchy 3 Hierarchy 4 Playlists Songs — — • Touching [] of “ALL” will play back all songs in the list. • Touching “ALL” will display the search list in the next hierarchy. Artists Albums Songs — • An alphabet skip function is available. Refer to “Alphabet Skip Albums Songs — — Function” (page 69). Songs — — — • For details on how to scroll through the list, refer to “Selecting an Podcasts Episodes — — Item in a List” (page 17). • After selecting a file via a search, touch [] on the main screen to Genres Artists Albums Songs display the search screen. The hierarchy level you selected last in the Composers Albums Songs — search mode is displayed. Audiobooks — — —

For example: Searching by Artist name The following example explains how an ARTISTS search is performed. Another search mode can be used for the same operation, although the hierarchy differs.

68-EN Searching for a Desired Video File Direct Up/Down Function

You can select a movie, music video, etc., from the list screen. If you touch [] of the album name in the search mode, this album will be played back repeatedly. To go to the previous or next Album, use the • Video search mode depends on the iPod/iPhone. If the specification Direct Up/Down Function. of the iPod/iPhone is changed, the search mode on this unit will also be changed. Touch [] or [] to select the desired Playlist/Artist/ Examples for the video search mode Album/Genre/Podcast/Composer. • Video Playlists • Movies • Music Videos, etc. For example: Searching by Movie The following example explains how a Movie search is performed. Another search mode can be used for the same operation, although the hierarchy differs.

1 Touch [ (Search)] of Bottom banner during playback. The Search screen is displayed. Direct Up/Down switch icon

Direct Up/Down switch icon:

Playlist

Artist

Album

Podcast

2 Touch [Video]. Genre The Video search mode screen appears. Composer 3 Touch [Movies]. The Movies search screen is displayed. • You can use the Direct Up/Down Function during video file playback. The Direct Up/Down Function switches in the video mode 4 Touch the desired movie. are [] []. The selected movie is played back. • If you are searching for a song, this operation cannot be performed. • For details on how to scroll through the list, refer to “Selecting an • If an album is selected from an artist search, the album can be Item in a List” (page 17). searched. • After selecting a file via a search, touch [] on the main screen to • During shuffle playback, this operation is not possible. display the search screen. The hierarchy level you selected last in the search mode is displayed

Alphabet Skip Function

The unit is provided with a alphabet skip function for effective searching. When you use this function in the search mode, you can quickly search an artist or a song, etc.

Alphabet skip function: The alphabet skip function is skipped to the next alphabet such as from A to B, B to C by touching [ALPHABET ]. You can also skip in reverse order such as from B to A by touching [ ALPHABET].

69-EN Repeat Play

Touch [] to repeatedly play back the currently track. The tracks (files) will be played repeatedly. Touch [] again to deactivate Repeat play. Repeat (OFF) Repeat

Random Play (Shuffle)

Touch [] during playback. The files will be played back in a random sequence. The Shuffle mode switches every time [] is touched. Shuffle Songs Shuffle Albums (OFF) Shuffle Songs

Shuffle Albums: The songs on each album are played back in proper order. Upon completing of all the songs on the album, the next album is selected randomly. This continues until all albums have been played. Shuffle Songs: Song shuffle randomly plays back songs within a selected category (playlist, album, etc.). The songs within the category are played just once until all songs have been played. • For details on the search mode, refer to “Searching for a Music File” (page 68).

Random Play (Shuffle Songs)

All files in the iPod are played back in random sequence. 1 Touch [ (Search)] of Bottom banner during playback.

2 Touch [Shuffle Songs]. The indicator “ ” lights, and the songs will be played back in random sequence. To cancel Random play, touch [ ].

70-EN Pandora® internet Listening to Pandora® radio (optional) 1 Launch the Pandora® on the smartphone. 2 Touch [Pandora®] or [Bluetooth Pandora®] of Top banner. (INE-W960/INE- The display changes to Pandora® mode screen. 3 To pause playback, touch [ / ]. NAV-60 only) [] is displayed in the middle of the screen. Touch [/] again or touch [] in the middle of the screen to start playback. Pandora® internet radio is your own FREE personalized radio now available to stream music on your Smartphone (which runs Android OS, 4 To skip to the next song, touch []. iOS or BlackBerry OS). Just start with the name of one of your favorite artists, songs or classical • The operation to replay a previous song is not available. • Pandora® limits the number of skips allowed on their service. If you composers and Pandora® will create a “station” that plays their music attempt to skip songs beyond the limit, “No skips remaining” is and more music like it. displayed. The INE-W960/INE-NAV-60 enables you to interact with your • Even if you reconnect an iPhone without launching Pandora ® Pandora account by connecting an iPhone and smartphone that has the Application while the power is off, Pandora mode (not iPod mode) is latest version of the Pandora® application installed. displayed when power is turned back on. • Depending on the signal status, song may be stopped during • Before this operation, set ALPINE APP to USB or BLUETOOTH playback. depending on the connected Smartphone. For details, refer to • When the advertisement is received, the playback time will be frozen “Setting the App connection method” (page 46). and key operation is invalid. • The playback time may not be correctly displayed. Display example for iPhone Pandora Radio screen • If pairing is not registered for the Bluetooth audio device, the message “No BLUETOOTH device connected (Only when App Connection Method is set to “Bluetooth (Android).”). Please check “BLUETOOTH settings.” appears on the screen. Change the audio device settings as per “Registering the BLUETOOTH Device” (page 47). • The display content varies when ads are received.

“Thumbs” Feedback

You can personalize your stations with “Thumbs Up” or “Thumbs Display example for BLUETOOTH Pandora Radio Down” feedback, which the system takes into account for future music screen selections. During playback, touch [ ] for thumbs up, or touch [ ] for thumbs down. :The “ ” indicator appears in the display. Pandora® will add similar music to your station. :The “ ” indicator is displayed. Pandora® will ban that song from your station, and the current song is skipped. If the number of skips allowed has reached its limit, the current song continues to play back.

Touch [<<], [>>] • In some situations, “Thumbs” feedback may not be available. “Unable to save your thumb rating.” will be displayed.

Station name Song Name Artist Name Album Name Track/Artist bookmark icon Artwork display Playing time

71-EN Searching for a Desired Station QuickMix

You can display your station list and select stations directly from the Use QuickMix to create a playlist based on two or more of your Pandora INE-W960/INE-NAV-60. stations. Edit your QuickMix station selections on the Pandora Compatible Application for iPhone when it is not connected to the INE- Alphabet Search W960/INE-NAV-60.

1 Touch [ (Search)] of Bottom banner to activate 1 Touch [ (Search)] of Bottom banner to activate the Search mode. the Search mode. The “By A-Z” or “By Date” search mode is activated and the 2 Touch [By A-Z]. station name is displayed. The “By A-Z” search mode is activated and the station names are listed alphabetically. 2 Touch [QuickMix]. 3 Touch the desired station. • The indicator lights, and the songs from the created stations are Pandora will play that station. played back in random sequence.

Search by Date Added Bookmarking a Desired Track or Artist 1 Touch [ (Search)] of Bottom banner to activate the Search mode. The currently playing song or artist can be bookmarked and saved to your Pandora account. 2 Touch [By Date]. The “By Date” search mode is activated and the station 1 During playback, touch [Artwork display]. names are listed by the date they were added to the The type selection telop is displayed. account.

3 Touch the desired station. Pandora will play that station.

Creating a New Station

Basing on the currently playing song or artist, a personalized Pandora station can be created. The new station will play more music like it. Artwork display Free word

1 During playback, touch [Create New Station]. 2 Touch [Track] or [Artist]. The Key Pad screen is displayed. You can enter a keyword The current track or artist is bookmarked. “ ” icon or and search for Artist/Song. “ ” icon is displayed. • Your bookmarks can be viewed on your “Profile” page at 2 Enter a keyword and touch [OK]. www.pandora.com. • In some situations, bookmarks may not be available. “Unable to save 3 Touch the desired list. your bookmark.” will be displayed. The new station is automatically applied. • For details of how to input characters from the keypad, refer to “How to Input Characters and Numbers (Keypad)” (page 73).

Artist/Track

During playback, touch [Create Station From (Artist/ Track)] of Bottom banner. • The created station is saved to your station list. • When the Smartphone is not connected to this unit, you can create personalized Pandora® stations using the Pandora® Application on your Smartphone. You can also create stations on the web at www.pandora.com. • In some situations, creating a new station may not be available. “Unable to create station.” will be displayed.

72-EN How to Input Characters and Numbers (Keypad)

The displayed screens and procedures may vary slightly depending on the function used, but the basic input method is the same.

Input screen area. (Delete) Returns to the previous character and erases it. Touching here for more than 2 seconds will erase all input characters. Character keypad (Space) Confirms input characters.

73-EN 1 Touch the [SiriusXM] on the Top banner. The SiriusXM main screen display appears. SiriusXM Satellite • The SiriusXM source selection icon will not be listed if the SiriusXM Tuner is not connected properly. Check the tuner Radio (Optional) connections if the icon is not shown. 2 Touch [] or [] to select the desired channel. Touching and holding either button will rapidly (INE-W960/INE- browse through the channels. • Refer to the SiriusXM Tuner User Guide for details on how to install NAV-60 only) the SiriusXM Tuner.

SiriusXM Tuner operation: Tuning Channels by Category When an optional SiriusXM Tuner is connected to this unit, the following operations may be performed. Channels are grouped into categories based on the type of content heard Display example for SiriusXM main screen on the channels. 1 Touch [Category] on the SiriusXM main screen to activate the category browsing mode. The channels within the category of the current channel are listed.

Display example of category browsing mode screen

Touch [<<], [>>]

Band display Displays the band of the signal currently being received. Channel name Category name Channel number Touching the [Info] button changes the display of Preset button information for the channels in the category with the Displays the preset channel name or channel number. following four options. Channel NO./Channel Name Channel NO./Artist Name Channel NO./Song Title Channel NO./ Receiving Channels with the SiriusXM Content Info Channel NO./ Channel Name Tuner 2 Touch Category [] or [] on the category browsing mode screen to select a desired category. About SiriusXM Satellite Radio The Category Name is shown at the top of the display. Only SiriusXM® brings you more of what you love to listen to, all in one place. Get over 140 channels, including commercial-free 3 Select the desired channel number. music plus the best sports, news, talk, comedy and • If no operation is performed for 10 seconds, the category browsing entertainment. Welcome to the world of satellite radio. A mode is canceled. SiriusXM Vehicle Tuner and Subscription are required. For more information, visit www.siriusxm.com. In the USA, you can activate online or by calling SiriusXM Listener care: • Visit www.siriusxm.com/activatenow • Call SiriusXM Listener Care at 1-866-635-2349 For Canadian Subscriptions, please contact: • Visit www.siriusxm.ca/activatexm • Call XM customer Care at 1-877-438-9677 • The SiriusXM Satellite Radio controls on this unit are available only when a SiriusXM Tuner is connected.

74-EN Changing the Display Tuning Channels Using Presets

Text information, such as the channel name, artist name/feature, and Touch [Band] on the Bottom banner repeatedly until song/program title, is available with SiriusXM. The unit can display this 1 the desired band is displayed. text information as explained below. Touch [Info] in SiriusXM mode. 2 Touch any one of the preset buttons that has a Each time you touch this button, the display changes as shown channel stored to it. below. The preset channel is received. • The , buttons provide the same functions above.

Channel Name Category Name Search Function Category Name Artist Name Channel No. Song Name Content Name 1 Touch [ (Search)] on the Bottom banner. Search list screen is displayed.

2 Touch the desired category. The channel name search screen of the selected category is displayed. Checking the SiriusXM Radio ID Number 3 Touch the selected channel. To subscribe to the SiriusXM Satellite Radio service, it is necessary to • You can change the category directly by touching Category [ ] or locate and identify the Radio ID of your SiriusXM Tuner. The Radio ID [] on the channel name search screen. contains 8 characters and can be found on the bottom of your SiriusXM Tuner or can be displayed when selecting Channel 0 by following the Searching by Channel steps below: 1 Touch [All Channels] after step 1. All Channels will be displayed in a list. 1 While receiving SiriusXM Radio, touch [] or [] to 2 Touch the selected channel. select channel “0”. The unit displays the ID number. • Touch [Info] on the channel name search screen, the information of the broadcasting channels will be displayed. You can choose the 2 To cancel the ID number display, change the channel desired channel from the artist name list or song name list. to a channel other than “0”. Each time you touch the [Info] button, the display changes as below. • The SiriusXM Radio ID does not contain the letters I, O, S, or F. Channel name Artist name Song name Content Channel name

Storing Channel Presets Searching by My Music 1 Touch [My Music]. You can store 18 of your favorite SiriusXM channels for easy recall The artist names and song names that you have stored with Preset buttons. and are currently playing will be displayed in a list. This is displayed only when the stored song or artist is 1 Touch [Band] to select the desired band you want to broadcasting. store the preset in. 2 Touch the desired artist/song. There are 3 Satellite Radio Preset bands. Each touch of The channel of the selected artist/song being broadcast [Band] changes the band: is received. SiriusXM-1 SiriusXM-2 SiriusXM-3 SiriusXM-1 • Touch [Info] on the channel name search screen, the information of 2 Touch and hold any one of the preset buttons for at the broadcasting channels will be displayed. You can choose the least 2 seconds. desired channel from the artist name list or song name list. The selected channel is stored. Each time you touch the [Info] button, the display changes as below. 3 Repeat the procedure to store up to 5 other channels Channel name Artist/Song name Channel name onto the same band. To use this procedure for other bands, simply select the desired band and repeat the procedure. A total of 18 channels can be stored in the preset memory (6 channels for each band; SiriusXM-1, SiriusXM-2 and SiriusXM-3.) • If you store a new channel into a preset which already has a channel assigned, the current channel will be cleared and replaced with the new one.

75-EN Searching by My Games 1 Touch [My Games]. Receiving and Tuning to an Alert This is displayed only when games for stored teams are broadcasting. Whenever a stored sports team, artist, or song is playing on another 2 Touch the desired team. channel, an interruption alert appears on the unit display. The channel of the selected game being broadcast is If you set to “On” in “Setting all Source Alert” (page 45), you can received. display the interruption alert of the stored channels on the Audio/Visual • Touch [Info] on the channel name search screen, the information of Source screen other than SiriusXM. the broadcasting channels will be displayed. You can choose the To tune to the game, artist or song identified by the alert, follow the desired channel from the league name list or team name list. steps below: Each time you touch the [Info] button, the display changes 1 When stored information is broadcast, the unit will as below. display “Song Alert,” “Artist Alert” or “Game Alert.” Channel name League/Team name Channel name

Selecting the Channel Directly

You can directly select the channel number on the display of the numeric keypad.

1 Touch [Direct Channel]. The numeric keypad input screen is displayed.

2 Touch to input the channel number. Alert display area 3 Touch [Enter]. Displaying the Alert List The selected channel is received. 2 Touch []. • When a triple-digit channel number is input, it is unnecessary to The current screen changes to the My Music list*1 or My touch [Enter]; the channel will be received automatically. Games list*2 screen. Touch the channel on the list you want to receive. Storing the Desired Song/Artist *1 Only for Song Alert and Artist Alert. *2 Only for Game Alert.

While listening to SiriusXM Satellite Radio, you can be alerted when Changing to the channel displayed on the Alert display your favorite songs or artists are playing on other channels. An interruption ALERT will be displayed when a matching artist or song is 2 Touch []. found on another channel. To receive interruption ALERT information, The source is changed to SiriusXM Tuner and the channel is refer to “Activating the stored Alert” below. changed to the received channel.

1 Touch and hold [Memo] for at least 2 seconds on 3 The display changes to the selected channel and the the SiriusXM mode screen. channel is received. The Memory type selection screen is displayed. • “Artist (Song) Unavailable” is displayed if the artist (song) is • If no operation is performed for 5 seconds, the screen returns to the not available to be stored. normal mode screen. “Artist (Song) Saved” is displayed if this Artist (Song) was previously stored.

2 Touch [Save Song?] or [Save Artist?] to select the store type. A “Song (Artist) Saved X Used/Y Empty” pop up screen is displayed. X is the total number of song titles, artist names or sports teams stored in memory, and Y is the total number of memory song titles, artist names or sports teams still available for storage. • If there is no memory space, “Alert Memory Full” is displayed and then you are asked if you want to replace a stored item. If you select “OK,” then the list of stored alert items is displayed. Touch the item that you want to replace. • For details on how to set up the Games Alert, refer to “Setting the Favorite Sports Team Alerts” (page 45).

76-EN Replay Function Parental Control Function

In SiriusXM mode, you can pause, rewind and replay live Satellite The Parental Control feature allows you to limit access to any SiriusXM Radio. channels, including those with mature content. For information on setting the Parental Control passcode, refer to “Setting the Parental Lock” (page 45). When a locked channel is selected, “Channel Locked” is displayed and then the numeric keypad appears for you to enter the passcode. Input the 4-digit passcode you set in “Setting the Parental Lock” on page 45. The initial number is 0000. • If you input a wrong passcode, “Incorrect passcode” is displayed. • After entering the correct passcode, you can access all locked channels without entering the passcode again until the unit is powered off and then back on. Buffer usage Current Replay point Time to live Using Jump Memory and Jump Recall Replay range Replay status indicator Function

1 Touch [/] to Pause playing of the channel The Jump Channel is a special channel that you can jump to with the content. press of a dedicated button and then jump back to the previous channel. The “ (Pause)” icon and progress bar is displayed. This channel is often used to select your favorite SiriusXM traffic and weather report channel. 2 Touch [/] again or touch [] in the middle of the screen to resume playing the content. 1 To store the currently received channel as the Jump The “ (Play)” icon lights up and offset playback channel in memory, touch and hold [JUMP] for at commences. least 2 seconds.

3 Touch [] to exit Instant Replay and listen to live 2 Touch [JUMP] to recall and tune to the saved Jump content. channel. • To fast reverse, touch and hold [] and to fast forward, touch and • Only one channel can be stored as the jump source channel. When hold []. you want to store a new channel, the old channel will be cleared and • Touching [] or [] will move a track up/down. the new one will be memorized. • If you change channels while in Replay mode, the contents of the replay buffer are emptied. • The allowed recording time differs depending on the SiriusXM Tuner Box.

77-EN Multi story function* With this function, a single movie includes various story lines. Information You can select different story lines to view various versions of the same movie. Operation differs from disc to disc. Story line selection screens including instructions appear during the movie. Just follow the Product Software Update instructions.

This product use software that can be updated through a USB memory * These functions differ from disc to disc. For details, refer to the disc’s instructions. device. Download the software from the Alpine website and update the product using the USB memory device.

Updating this product Check the Alpine website for details on updating. http://www.alpine-usa.com

About DVDs

Music CDs and DVDs have grooves (tracks) in which the digital data is recorded. The data is represented as microscopic pits recorded into the track – these pits are read by a laser beam to play the disc. On DVDs, the density of the tracks and pits is twice that of CDs, so DVDs can contain more data in less space.

CDs

Minimum pit Track pitch - length - 1.2 mm 0.9 µm 1.6 µm

DVDs

Minimum pit length - 0.6 mm Track pitch - 0.9 µm 0.6 mm 0.74 µm

A 12 cm disc can contain one movie or about four hours of music. In addition, DVDs provide sharp picture quality with vivid colors thanks to a horizontal resolution of over 500 lines (compared to less than 300 for VHS tape).

In addition, DVDs offer a variety of functions.

Multiple audio* (page 28) Movies can be recorded in up to eight languages. The desired language can be selected from the unit.

Subtitles function* (page 28) Movies can include subtitles in up to 32 languages. The desired subtitle language can be selected from the unit.

Multi angle function* (page 28) When the DVD contains a movie shot from multiple angles, the desired angle can be selected from the unit.

78-EN List of Language Codes

(For details, see page 42.)

Abbreviation Code Language Abbreviation Code Language Abbreviation Code Languag e AA 6565 Afar IE 7369 Inter lingue RN 8278 Kirundi AB 6566 Abkhazian IK 7375 Inupiak RO 8279 Romanian AF 6570 Afr ikaans IN 7378 Indonesian RU 8285 Russian AM 6577 Amhar ic IS 7383 Icelandic RW 8287 Kiny arwanda AR 6582 Arabic IT 7384 Italian SA 8365 Sanskrit AS 6583 Assamese IW 7387 Hebrew SD 8368 Sindhi AY 6589 Aymara JP 7465 Japanese SG 8371 Sangho AZ 6590 Azerbaijani JI 7473 Yiddish SH 8372 Serbo-Croatian BA 6665 Bashkir JW 7487 Ja v anese SI 8373 Singhalese BE 6669 Byelorussian KA 7565 Georgian SK 8375 Slov ak BG 6671 Bulgar ian KK 7575 Kazakh SL 8376 Slov enian BH 6672 Bihari KL 7576 Greenlandic SM 8377 Samoan BI 6673 Bislama KM 7577 Cambodian SN 8378 Shona BN 6678 Bengali, Bangla KN 7578 Kannada SO 8379 Somali BO 6679 Tibetan KO 7579 Korean SQ 8381 Albanian BR 6682 Breton KS 7583 Kashmir i SR 8382 Serbian CA 6765 Catalan KU 7585 Kurdish SS 8383 Sisw ati CO 6779 Corsican KY 7589 Kirghiz ST 8384 Sesotho CS 6783 Czech LA 7665 Latin SU 8385 Sundanese CY 6789 Welsh LN 7678 Lingala SV 8386 Swedish DA 6865 Danish LO 7679 Laothian SW 8387 Swahili DE 6869 Ger man LT 7684 Lithuanian TA 8465 Tamil DZ 6890 Bhutani LV 7686 Latvian, Lettish TE 8469 Telugu EL 6976 Greek MG 7771 Malagasy TG 8471 Tajik EN 6978 English MI 7773 Maor i TH 8472 Thai EO 6979 Esperanto MK 7775 Macedonian TI 8473 Tigriny a ES 6983 Spanish ML 7776 Malay alam TK 8475 Tur kmen ET 6984 Estonian MN 7778 Mongolian TL 8476 Tagalog EU 6985 Basque MO 7779 Moldavian TN 8478 Setsw ana FA 7065 Persian MR 7782 Marathi TO 8479 Tonga FI 7073 Finnish MS 7783 Malay TR 8482 Tur kish FJ 7074 Fiji MT 7784 Maltese TS 8483 Tsonga FO 7079 Faroese MY 7789 Bur mese TT 8484 Tatar FR 7082 French NA 7865 Nauru TW 8487 Twi FY 7089 Fr isian NE 7869 Nepali UK 8575 Ukrainian GA 7165 Ir ish NL 7876 Dutch UR 8582 Urdu GD 7168 Scots Gaelic NO 7879 Norwegian UZ 8590 Uzbek GL 7176 Galician OC 7967 Occitan VI 8673 Vietnamese GN 7178 Guarani OM 7977 (Afan) Oromo VO 8679 Volapuk GU 7185 Gujarati OR 7982 Or iya WO 8779 Wolof HA 7265 Hausa PA 8065 Punjabi XH 8872 Xhosa HI 7273 Hindi PL 8076 Polish YO 8979 Yor uba HR 7282 Croatian PS 8083 Pashto , Pushto ZH 9072 Chinese HU 7285 Hungarian PT 8084 Por tuguese ZU 9085 Zulu HY 7289 Ar menian QU 8185 Quechua IA 7365 Inter lingua RM 8277 Rhaeto-Romance

79-EN List of Country Codes

(For details, see page 42.)

Abbreviation Code Country AbbreviationCodeCountry Abbreviation Code Country AD 6568 Andorra DM 6877 Dominica KI 7573 Kiribati AE 6569 United Arab Emirates DO 6879 Dominican Republic KM 7577 Comoros AF 6570 Afghanistan DZ 6890 Algeria KN 7578 Saint Kitts and Nevis AG 6571 Antigua and Barbuda EC 6967 Ecuador KP 7580 Korea, Democratic AI 6573 Anguilla EE 6969 Estonia People’s Republic of AL 6576 Albania EG 6971 Egypt KR 7582 Korea, Republic of AM 6577 Armenia EH 6972 Western Sahara KW 7587 Kuwait AN 6578 Netherlands Antilles ER 6982 Eritrea KY 7589 Cayman Islands AO 6579 Angola ES 6983 Spain KZ 7590 Kazakstan AQ 6581 Antarctica ET 6984 Ethiopia LA 7665 Lao People’s AR 6582 Argentina FI 7073 Finland Democratic Republic AS 6583 American Samoa FJ 7074 Fiji LB 7666 Lebanon AT 6584 Austria FK 7075 Falkland Islands LC 7667 Saint Lucia AU 6585 Australia FM 7077 Micronesia, Federated States of LI 7673 Liechtenstein AW 6587 Aruba FO 7079 Faroe Islands LK 7675 Sri Lanka AZ 6590 Azerbaijan FR 7082 France LR 7682 Liberia BA 6665 Bosnia and Herzegovina GA 7165 Gabon LS 7683 Lesotho BB 6666 Barbados GB 7166 United Kingdom LT 7684 Lithuania BD 6668 Bangladesh GD 7168 Grenada LU 7685 Luxembourg BE 6669 Belgium GE 7169 Georgia LV 7686 Latvia BF 6670 Burkina Faso GF 7170 French Guiana LY 7689 Libyan Arab Jamahiriya BG 6671 Bulgaria GH 7172 Ghana MA 7765 Morocco BH 6672 Bahrain GI 7173 Gibraltar MC 7767 Monaco BI 6673 Burundi GL 7176 Greenland MD 7768 Moldova, Republic of BJ 6674 Benin GM 7177 Gambia MG 7771 Madagascar BM 6677 Bermuda GN 7178 Guinea MH 7772 Marshall Islands BN 6678 Brunei Darussalam GP 7180 Guadeloupe MK 7775 Macedonia, The former BO 6679 Bolivia GQ 7181 Equatorial Guinea Yugoslav Republic of BR 6682 Brazil GR 7182 Greece ML 7776 Mali BS 6683 Bahamas GS 7183 South Georgia and the MM 7777 Myanmar BT 6684 Bhutan South Sandwich Islands MN 7778 Mongolia BV 6686 Bouvet Island GT 7184 Guatemala MO 7779 Macau BW 6687 Botswana GU 7185 Guam MP 7780 Northern Mariana Islands BY 6689 Belarus GW 7187 Guinea-Bissau MQ 7781 Martinique BZ 6690 Belize GY 7189 Guyana MR 7782 Mauritania CA 6765 Canada HK 7275 Hong Kong MS 7783 Montserrat CC 6767 Cocos (Keeling) Islands HM 7277 Heard Island and MT 7784 Malta CD 6768 Congo, the Democratic McDonald Islands MU 7785 Mauritius Republic of the HN 7278 Honduras MV 7786 Maldives CF 6770 Central African Republic HR 7282 Croatia MW 7787 Malawi CG 6771 Congo HT 7284 Haiti MX 7788 Mexico CH 6772 Switzerland HU 7285 Hungary MY 7789 Malaysia CI 6773 Cote d’lvoire ID 7368 Indonesia MZ 7790 Mozambique CK 6775 Cook Islands IE 7369 Ireland NA 7865 Namibia CL 6776 Chile IL 7376 Israel NC 7867 New Caledonia CM 6777 Cameroon IN 7378 India NE 7869 Niger CN 6778 China IO 7379 British Indian Ocean Territory NF 7870 Norfolk Island CO 6779 Colombia IQ 7381 Iraq NG 7871 Nigeria CR 6782 Costa Rica IR 7382 Iran, Islamic Republic of NI 7873 Nicaragua CU 6785 Cuba IS 7383 Iceland NL 7876 Netherlands CV 6786 Cape Verde IT 7384 Italy NO 7879 Norway CX 6788 Christmas Island JM 7477 Jamaica NP 7880 Nepal CY 6789 Cyprus JO 7479 Jordan NR 7882 Nauru CZ 6790 Czech Republic JP 7480 Japan NU 7885 Niue DE 6869 Germany KE 7569 Kenya NZ 7890 New Zealand DJ 6874 Djibouti KG 7571 Kyrgyzstan OM 7977 Oman DK 6875 Denmark KH 7572 Cambodia PA 8065 Panama

80-EN Abbreviation Code Country AbbreviationCode Country Abbreviation Code Country PE 8069 Peru SJ 8374 Svalbard and Jan Mayen TW 8487 Taiwan, Province of China PF 8070 French Polynesia SK 8375 Slovakia TZ 8490 Tanzania, United Republic of PG 8071 Papua New Guinea SL 8376 Sierra Leone UA 8565 Ukraine PH 8072 Philippines SM 8377 San Marino UG 8571 Uganda PK 8075 Pakistan SN 8378 Senegal UM 8577 United States Minor Outlying Islands PL 8076 Poland SO 8379 Somalia US 8583 United States PM 8077 Saint Pierre and Miquelon SR 8382 Suriname UY 8589 Uruguay PN 8078 Pitcairn ST 8384 Sao Tome and Principe UZ 8590 Uzbekistan PR 8082 Puerto Rico SV 8386 El Salvador VA 8665 Holy See (Vatican City State) PT 8084 Portugal SY 8389 Syrian Arab Republic VC 8667 Saint Vincent and the PW 8087 Palau SZ 8390 Swaziland Grenadines PY 8089 Paraguay TC 8467 Turks and Caicos Islands VE 8669 Venezuela QA 8165 Qatar TD 8468 Chad VG 8671 Virgin Island, British RE 8269 Reunion TF 8470 French Southern Territories VI 8673 Virgin Islands, U.S RO 8279 Romania TG 8471 Togo VN 8678 Viet Nam RU 8285 Russian Federation TH 8472 Thailand VU 8685 Vanuatu RW 8287 Rwanda TJ 8474 Tajikistan WF 8770 Wallis and Futuna SA 8365 Saudi Arabia TK 8475 Tokelau WS 8783 Samoa SB 8366 Solomon Islands TM 8477 Turkmenistan YE 8969 Yemen SC 8367 Seychelles TN 8478 Tunisia YT 8984 Mayotte SD 8368 Sudan TO 8479 Tonga YU 8985 Yugoslavia SE 8369 Sweden TP 8480 East Timor ZA 9065 South Africa SG 8371 Singapore TR 8482 Turkey ZM 9077 Zambia SH 8372 Saint Helena TT 8484 Trinidad and Tobago ZW 9087 Zimbabwe SI 8373 Slovenia TV 8486 Tuvalu

81-EN Broadcast is noisy. In Case of Difficulty • The antenna is not the proper length. - Extend the antenna fully; replace it if it is broken. • The antenna is poorly grounded. If you encounter a problem, please turn the power off, then on again. - Make sure the antenna is grounded properly at its mounting location. If the unit is still not functioning normally, please review the items in • The station signal is weak and noisy. the following checklist. This guide will help you isolate the problem - If above solution does not work, tune in another station. if the unit is at fault. Otherwise, make sure the rest of your system is Disc properly connected, or then consult your authorized Alpine dealer. Disc playback sound is wavering. • Moisture condensation in the disc Module. Basic - Allow enough time for the condensation to evaporate (about 1 No function or display. hour). • Vehicle’s ignition is off. Disc insertion not possible. - If connected according to the instructions, the unit will not • A disc is already in this unit. operate with the vehicle’s ignition off. - Eject the disc and remove it. • Improper power lead connections. • The disc is being improperly inserted. - Check power lead connections. - Insert the disc correctly. (See page 15) •Blown fuse. - Check the fuse on the battery lead of the unit; replace with the Unable to fast forward or backward the disc. proper value if necessary. • The disc has been damaged. • Internal micro-computer malfunctioned due to interference - Eject the disc and discard it; using a damaged disc in your unit noise, etc. can cause damage to the mechanism. - Press the RESET switch with a ballpoint pen or other pointed Disc playback sound skips due to vibration. article. • Improper mounting of the unit. No sound or unnatural sound. - Securely re-mount the unit. • Incorrect setting of volume/balance/fader controls. • Disc is very dirty. - Readjust the controls. - Clean the disc. • Connections are not properly or securely made. • Disc has scratches. - Check the connections and firmly connect. - Change the disc. • The pick-up lens is dirty. Screen not displayed. - Do not use a commercially available lens cleaner disc. Consult • Brightness/Contrast control is set at the minimum position. your nearest Alpine dealer. - Adjust the Brightness/Contrast control. • Temperature in the vehicle is too low. Disc playback sound skips without vibration. - Increase the vehicle’s interior temperature to operation • Dirty or scratched disc. temperature range. - Clean the disc; a damaged disc should be replaced. • Connections to the DVD are not securely made. CD-R/CD-RW/DVD-R/DVD-RW/DVD+R/DVD+RW playback - Check the connections and firmly connect. not possible. • The Parking Brake Lead is not connected. • Close session (finalization) has not been performed. • The Parking Brake is not engaged. - Perform finalization and attempt playback again. - Connect the Parking Brake Lead, then engage the Parking Brake. (See page 92) Error displays. • Mechanical error. Movement of displayed picture is abnormal. - Press . After the error indication disappears, insert the disc • Temperature in the vehicle is too high. again. If the above-mentioned solution does not solve the - Allow the vehicle’s interior temperature to cool. problem, consult your nearest Alpine dealer. Radio MP3/WMA/AAC is not played back. Unable to receive stations. • Writing error occurred. The CD format is not compatible. • No antenna, or open connection in the antenna cable. - Make sure the CD has been written in a supported format. - Make sure the antenna is properly connected; replace the Refer to “About MP3/WMA/AAC” (pages 22 to 23), then antenna or cable if necessary. rewrite in the format supported by this device. Unable to tune stations in the seek mode. Unit does not operate. • You are in a weak signal area. • Condensation. - Make sure the tuner is in DX mode. - Wait a while (about 1 hour) for the condensation to dry. • If the area you are in is a primary signal area, the antenna may not be grounded and connected properly. - Check your antenna connections; make sure the antenna is properly grounded at its mounting location. • The antenna may not be the proper length. - Make sure the antenna is fully extended; if broken, replace the antenna with a new one.

82-EN Playback does not start. USB device error. • Disc is loaded upside-down. • An iPod/iPhone that is not supported by the unit is connected. - Check the disc and load it with the labeled side facing upward. - Connect an iPod/iPhone that is supported by the unit. •Disc is dirty. - Reset the iPod. - Clean the disc. • A USB device that is not supported by the unit is connected. • A disc not able to play back with this unit is loaded. - Attempt to connect another USB memory device. - Check if the disc is able to be played back. • Communication error. • Parental lock is set. - Turn the ignition key off, and then set to ON again. - Cancel the parental lock or change the rating level. - Check the display by reconnecting between the iPod/iPhone and the unit, using the iPod/iPhone cable. Picture is unclear or noisy. - Check the display by reconnecting between the USB memory • Disc is being fast-forwarded or fast-reversed. device and the unit. - The picture may be slightly disturbed, but this is normal. • Caused by the iPod/iPhone Software Version not being • Vehicle’s battery power is weak. compatible with this unit. - Check the battery power and wiring. - Update the iPod/iPhone Software Version to be compatible (The unit may malfunction if the battery power is under 11 with this unit. volts with a load applied.) • The iPod/iPhone is not verified. Image stops sometimes. - Change another iPod/iPhone. • Disc is scratched. - Replaced with a non-scratched disc. Region Code Violation. • Disc does not match regional code number. - Load a disc that matches the regional code number. If this Message Appears No data. Various messages are displayed on the screen during operation. In • There are no data in the iPod/iPhone. addition to the messages telling you the current status or providing - Download data to the iPod/iPhone and connect to the INE- guidance for the next operation, there are also the following error W960/INE-NAV-60/INE-W960S. messages. If one of these error messages is displayed, carefully follow • There are no data in the USB memory. the instructions in the solution column. - Download data to the USB memory and connect to this unit.

System Un-readable song was skipped. USB current error. • A copy-protected WMA file has been detected. • Abnormal current is run to the USB connector device. - You can only play back non-copy-protected files. - Turn the ignition key off, and then set to ON again. • A sampling rate/bit rate not supported by the unit is used. - Attempt to connect another iPod/iPhone/USB memory device. - Use a sampling rate/bit rate supported by the unit.

Unable to access the DVD drive. The system will reset. BLUETOOTH • An access error to DVD drive occurred for some reasons. Please check BLUETOOTH audio device. - The unit is rebooted automatically. • The BLUETOOTH audio device was not connected correctly. - Check the settings for INE-W960/INE-NAV-60/INE-W960S Unable to access the DVD drive. and the BLUETOOTH audio device and reconnect. Please enquire details from the service center. • An access error to DVD drive occurred for some reasons. Please check mobile device. - Please ask Service Center for help. • The mobile phone was not connected correctly. - Check the settings for INE-W960/INE-NAV-60/INE-W960S and the mobile phone and reconnect. Audio/Visual Read error. Unable to download phonebook. Please check the Disc. • Phonebook failed to read due to mobile phone disconnection, • Scratched disc, contaminated disc/poor recording/disc etc. incompatible with this unit. - Check the mobile phone connection, and then conduct - Press . synchronizing and adding again. (See page 55) - Change the disc. • The connected mobile phone does not support synchronizing of its phone book. - Connect the mobile phone that supports synchronizing the phone book, then synchronize again. (See page 55)

83-EN Navigation Video resolution not supported. ® The vehicle’s position is erroneous. • The file being played is a DivX file with an unsupported • The GPS reception is poor. resolution. ® - Drive the vehicle in an area of good GPS reception to allow the - Play a DivX file with a supported resolution. unit to recalibrate itself. Move to a location where strong GPS reception is possible. SiriusXM No operation Check Tuner • Moisture condensation • The SiriusXM Tuner is disconnected or the unit is having trouble - Allow enough time for the condensation to evaporate (about 1 communicating with the Tuner. hour). - Connect the Tuner or check the Tuner connection to the back • Ambient Temperature of the unit. - Make sure the temperature inside the vehicle is between 0°C and 45°C (32°F and 113°F). Check Antenna • The SiriusXM Satellite Radio antenna or cable is either damaged or not connected correctly to the SiriusXM Tuner. Playing back a DRM protected DivX File - Check that the SiriusXM antenna cable is connected to the Some operations cannot be performed while displaying the following SiriusXM Tuner and check that the antenna cable is not kinked message. or otherwise damaged. Replace the antenna if necessary. Authorization Error. No Signal This player is not authorized to play this video. • The SiriusXM satellite signal is too weak at the current location. • The version of the DRM protected DivX® File is not supported - Move the vehicle to a location with a clear view of the southern by this unit. sky. - Play the supported DivX® File. - Make sure the Satellite Radio antenna is properly mounted and not obstructed by metal objects. Rental Expired. • The file being attempted to play has a limited number of Channel Not Subscribed Call SiriusXM to Subscribe viewings. The viewing limit has been reached and can no longer • The active channel has become unsubscribed or the requested be played on this device. After the message has been displayed, channel is not available in your subscription package. the beginning of the next file will automatically be played back. - In the U.S.A., visit www.siriusxm.com or call 1-866-635-2349 if you have questions about your subscription. In Canada, visit This DivX rental has used XX out of YY views. www.siriusxm.ca or call 1-877-438-9677 if you have questions Continue? about your subscription. • If the total number of viewings for this file has not been exceeded, the views remaining is displayed. • The unit will revert to the previous selected channel or to channel 1 - To play back, select [OK]. If the next file is to be played back, automatically. select [Cancel]. Channel Not Available • The active channel is no longer in the SiriusXM channel lineup Do you wish to stop playing rental file? or the user has entered an invalid channel number. • While playing back a rental file, “Do you wish to stop playing - Visit www.siriusxm.com for information on the current rental file?” is displayed when the following operations are channel lineup. performed. Selecting [OK], reduces the number of views by 1. • Folder Up/Down • The unit will revert to the previous channel or to channel 1 •STOP automatically. • Search operation • Move to the first/last DivX® file by Chapter Up/Down Subscription Updated Press Any key to Continue - To interrupt the playback, touch [OK], or touch [Cancel] to • Your subscription has been updated. not interrupt. - Press any button to clear this message.

Audio format not supported. Channel Locked • The file being played is a DivX® file with an unsupported audio • A locked channel is selected. format, so only the video data is played. - Input the passcode on the number keypad screen, refer to -Play a DivX® file with a supported audio format. “Parental Control Function” (page 77). If wrong passcode is input, “Incorrect passcode” will be displayed and the unit will Video frame rate not supported. revert to the previous channel. • The file being played is a DivX® file with an unsupported frame rate. -Play a DivX® file with a supported frame rate.

84-EN PICKUP Specifications Wave length DVD: 666 nm CD: 785 nm MONITOR SECTION Laser power CLASS II Screen Size 6.1" GPS SECTION LCD Type Transparent type TN LCD Operation System TFT active matrix GPS Reception frequency 1575.42 ±1 MHz Number of Picture Elements 1,152,000 pcs. (800 × 3 × 480) GPS Reception sensitivity -130 dB max. Effective Number of Picture Elements 99% or more BLUETOOTH SECTION Illumination System LED BLUETOOTH Specification Bluetooth V2.1+EDR Output Power +4 dBm Max. (Power class 2) FM TUNER SECTION Profile HFP (Hands-Free Profile) Tuning Range 87.7 – 107.9 MHz OPP (Object Push Profile) Mono Usable Sensitivity 9.3 dBf (0.8 µV/75 ohms) PBAP (Phone Book Access Profile) 50 dB Quieting Sensitivity 13.5 dBf (1.3 µV/75 ohms) A2DP (Advanced Audio Alternate Channel Selectivity 80 dB Distribution Profile) AVRCP (Audio/Video Remote Signal-to-Noise Ratio 65 dB Control Profile) Stereo Separation 35 dB Capture Ratio 2.0 dB GENERAL

AM TUNER SECTION Power Requirement 14.4 V DC (11–16 V allowable) Tuning Range 530 – 1,710 kHz Operating temperature -20°C to + 60°C Usable Sensitivity 22.5 µV/27 dBf (-4°F to +140°F) Weight 2.12 kg (4 lbs. 11 oz) USB SECTION Audio output level USB requirements USB 1.1/2.0 Preout (Front, Rear): 4V/10 kohms (max.) Max. Power Consumption 1,000 mA Preout (Subwoofer): 4V/10 kohms (max.) USB Class USB (Play From Device)/ USB (Mass Storage Class) CHASSIS SIZE File System FAT16/32 MP3 Decoding MPEG-1/2 AUDIO Layer-3 Width 178 mm (7-1/8") WMA Decoding Windows Media™ Audio Height 100 mm (4") AAC Decoding AAC-LC format “.m4a” file Depth 165 mm (6-1/2") Number of Channels 2-Channel (Stereo) Frequency Response* 5-20,000 Hz (±1 dB) NOSE SIZE Total Harmonic Distortion 0.008% (at 1 kHz) Width 170 mm (6-3/4") Dynamic Range 95 dB (at 1 kHz) Height 96 mm (3-7/8") Signal-to-Noise Ratio 100 dB Depth 11.5 mm (15/32") Channel Separation 85 dB (at 1 kHz) * Frequency response may differ depending on the encoder • Due to continuous product improvement, specifications and design software/bit rate. are subject to change without notice. • The LCD panel is manufactured using an extremely high precision CD/DVD SECTION manufacturing technology. Its effective pixel ratio is over 99.99%. This means that there is a possibility that 0.01% of the pixels could Frequency Response 5 – 20,000 Hz (±1 dB) be either always ON or OFF. Wow & Flutter (% WRMS) Below measurable limits Total Harmonic Distortion 0.008% (at 1 kHz) CAUTION Dynamic Range 95 dB (at 1 kHz) Channel Separation 85 dB (at 1 kHz) CAUTION-Laser radiation when open, DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM Signal system NTSC/PAL Horizontal resolution 500 lines or greater (Bottom side of player) Video output level 1Vp-p (75 ohms) Video S/N ratio DVD: 60 dB Audio S/N ratio 100 dB

85-EN NO LIABILITY FOR CERTAIN DAMAGES. END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT EXCEPT AS PROHIBITED BY LAW, MS SHALL HAVE NO (Microsoft) LIABILITY FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR THE SOFTWARE. THIS LIMITATION SHALL APPLY EVEN IF ANY REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE. IN NO You have acquired a device (“DEVICE”) that includes software EVENT SHALL MS BE LIABLE FOR ANY AMOUNT IN EXCESS licensed by Alpine Electronics, Inc. (collectively “ALPINE”) from OF U.S. TWO HUNDRED FIFTY DOLLARS (U.S. $250.00). an affiliate of Microsoft Corporation (collectively “MS”). Those installed software products of MS origin, as well as associated LIMITATIONS ON REVERSE ENGINEERING, media, printed materials, and “online” or electronic DECOMPILATION, AND DISASSEMBLY documentation (“SOFTWARE”) are protected by international You may not reverse engineer, decompile, or disassemble the intellectual property laws and treaties. The SOFTWARE is SOFTWARE, except and only to the extent that such activity is licensed, not sold. All rights reserved. expressly permitted by applicable law notwithstanding this IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS END USER LICENSE limitation. AGREEMENT (“EULA”), DO NOT USE THE DEVICE OR COPY THE SOFTWARE INSTEAD, PROMPTLY CONTACT ALPINE FOR ADDITIONAL SOFTWARE/SERVICES. INSTRUCTIONS ON RETURN OF THE UNUSED DEVICE(S) FOR The SOFTWARE may permit ALPINE, MS, Microsoft Corporation A REFUND. ANY USE OF THE SOFTWARE, INCLUDING BUT or their affiliates to provide or make available to you SOFTWARE NOT LIMITED TO USE ON THE DEVICE, WILL CONSTITUTE updates, supplements, add-on components, or Internet – base YOUR AGREEMENT TO THIS EULA (OR RATIFICATION OF ANY service components of the SOFTWARE after the date you obtain PREVIOUS CONSENT). your initial copy of the SOFTWARE (“Supplemental Components”). GRANT OF SOFTWARE LICENSE, • If ALPINE provides or makes available to you This EULA grants you the following license: You may use the Supplemental Components and no other EULA terms are SOFTWARE only on the DEVICE. provided along with the Supplemental Components, then the terms of this EULA shall apply. NOT FAULT TOLERANT. • If MS, Microsoft Corporation or their affiliates make THE SOFTWARE IS NOT FAULT TOLERANT. ALPINE HAS available Supplemental Components, and no other EULA INDEPENDENTLY DETERMINED HOW TO USE THE SOFTWARE terms are provided, then the terms of this EULA shall IN THE DEVICE, AND MS HAS RELIED UPON ALPINE TO apply, except that MS, Microsoft Corporation or affiliate CONDUCT SUFFICIENT TESTING TO DETERMINE THAT THE entity providing the Supplemental Component(s) shall be SOFTWARE IS SUITABLE FOR SUCH USE. licensor of the Supplemental Component(s). NO WARRANTIES FOR THE SOFTWARE, • ALPINE, MS, Microsoft Corporation and their affiliates THE SOFTWARE is provided “AS IS“ and with all faults. THE reserve the right to discontinue any Internet-based ENTIRE RISK AS TO SATISFACTORY QUALITY, services provided to you or made available to you through PERFORMANCE, ACCURACY, AND EFFORT (INCLUDING the use of the SOFTWARE. LACK OF NEGLIGENCE) IS WITH YOU. ALSO, THERE IS NO RECOVERY MEDIA. WARRANTY AGAINST INTERFERENCE WITH YOUR If SOFTWARE is provided by ALPINE on separate media and ENJOYMENT OF THE SOFTWARE OR AGAINST labeled “Recovery Media” you may use the Recovery Media INFRINGEMENT. IF YOU HAVE RECEIVED ANY WARRANTIES solely to restore or reinstall the SOFTWARE originally installed on REGARDING THE DEVICE OR SOFTWARE THOSE the DEVICE. WARRANTIES DO NOT ORIGINATE FROM, AND ARE NOT BINDING ON, MS. UPGRADES. If the SOFTWARE is provided by ALPINE separate from the DEVICE on separate media or via web download or other means, and is labeled “For Upgrade Purposes Only” you may install one (1) copy of such SOFTWARE onto the DEVICE as a replacement copy for the existing SOFTWARE, and use it in accordance with this EULA, including any additional EULA terms accompanying the upgrade SOFTWARE. TERMINATION. Without prejudice to any other rights, ALPINE or MS may terminate this EULA if you fail to comply with the terms and conditions of this EULA. In such event, you must destroy all copies of the SOFTWARE and all of its component parts.

86-EN INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS. All title and intellectual property rights in and to the SOFTWARE END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT (HERE) (including but not limited to any images, photographs, animations, video, audio, music, text and “applets,” In using this Navigation System (hereinafter referred to as incorporated into the SOFTWARE), the accompanying printed “System”), which includes Alpine Electronics, Inc. (“Alpine”) materials, and any copies of the SOFTWARE, are owned by MS, Specifications, Space Machine, Inc. (“Space Machine”) Microsoft Corporation, their affiliates or suppliers. The Software and HERE North America, LLC. (“HERE”) Database, SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. you are bound by the terms and conditions set forth below. By You may not copy the printed materials accompanying the breaking the seal on the System and using your copy of the System, you have demonstrated your agreement to the terms SOFTWARE. All title and intellectual property rights in and to the and conditions of this Agreement. You should, therefore, make content which may be accessed through use of the SOFTWARE sure that you read and understand the following provisions. is the property of the respective content owner and may be protected by applicable copyright or other intellectual property The System may not be copied, duplicated or otherwise laws and treaties. This EULA grants you no rights to use such modified, in whole or in part, without the express written content. All rights not specifically granted under this EULA are permission of Alpine, Space Machine and HERE. reserved by MS, Microsoft Corporation, their affiliates and The System may not be transferred or sublicensed to any third suppliers. Use of any on-line services which may be accessed party for profit, rent or loan or licensed for reuse in any manner. through the SOFTWARE may be governed by the respective The System may not be decompiled, reverse engineered or terms of use relating to such services. If this SOFTWARE otherwise disassembled, in whole or in part. contains documentation that is provided only in electronic form, The System may not be used in a network or by any other you may print one copy of such electronic documentation. manner of simultaneous use in multiple systems. The System is intended solely for personal use (or internal use TRADEMARKS. where the end-user is a business) by the consumer. This EULA does not grant you any rights in connection with any The System is not to be used for commercial purposes. trademarks or service marks of ALPINE, MS, Microsoft Neither Alpine, Space Machine nor HERE guarantees to the Corporation, their affiliates or suppliers. customer that the System meet the specific objectives of the user. PRODUCT SUPPORT. Neither Alpine, Space Machine nor HERE shall be responsible Product support for the SOFTWARE is not provided by MS, its for any damages caused by the use of the System to the actual parent corporation Microsoft Corporation, or their affiliates or user and to any third party. subsidiaries. For product support, please refer to ALPINE The warranty on the System shall not extend to an exchange or support number provided in the documentation for the DEVICE. refund due to misspelling, omission of letters, or any other Should you have any questions concerning this EULA, or if you cosmetic discrepancy in layout found in the System. desire to contact ALPINE for any other reason, please refer to The right to use the System shall expire either when the user the address provided in the documentation for the DEVICE. destroys this software, or when any of the terms for use is violated and Alpine, Space Machine and/or HERE exercise the SOFTWARE TRANSFER ALLOWED BUT WITH option to revoke the license to use this software. RESTRICTIONS. The terms and conditions hereof apply to all subsequent users You may permanently transfer rights under this EULA only as and owner’s as well as to the original purchaser. part of a permanent sale or transfer of the Device, and only if the recipient agrees to this EULA. If the SOFTWARE is an upgrade, The HERE Database may include or reflect data of licensors, any transfer must also include all prior versions of the including Her Majesty The Queen in right of CANADA. Such data SOFTWARE. is licensed on an “AS IS” basis. The licensors, including Her Majesty The Queen, make no guarantees, representations or EXPORT RESTRICTION. warranties respecting such data, either express or implied, You acknowledge that SOFTWARE is of US-origin. You agree to arising by law or otherwise, accuracy or fitness for a particular comply with all applicable international and national laws that purpose. apply to the SOFTWARE, including the U.S. Export The licensors, including Her Majesty The Queen, shall not be Administration Regulations, as well as end-user, end-use and liable in respect of any claim, demand or action, irrespective of country destination restrictions issued by U.S. and other the nature of the cause of the claim, demand or action alleging any loss, injury or damages, direct or indirect, which may result governments. For additional information on exporting the from the use or possession of the data or the HERE database. SOFTWARE, see http://www.microsoft.com/exporting/ The licensors, including Her Majesty The Queen, shall not be liable in any way for loss of revenues or contracts, or any other consequential loss of any kind resulting from any defect in the data or the HERE database. End User shall indemnify and save harmless the licensors, including Her Majesty The Queen and the minister, and their officers, employees and agents from and against any claim, demand or action, irrespective of the nature of the cause of the claim, demand or action, alleging loss, costs, expenses, damages or injuries (including injuries resulting in death) arising out of the use or possession of the data or the HERE database.

87-EN Installation and Connections

Before installing or connecting the unit, please read the following and pages 7 to 12 of this manual thoroughly for proper use. Caution HAVE THE WIRING AND INSTALLATION DONE BY EXPERTS. The wiring and installation of this unit requires special technical Warning skill and experience. To ensure safety, always contact the dealer where you purchased this product to have the work done. MAKE THE CORRECT CONNECTIONS. Failure to make the proper connections may result in fire or product USE SPECIFIED ACCESSORY PARTS AND INSTALL THEM damage. SECURELY. USE ONLY IN CARS WITH A 12 VOLT NEGATIVE GROUND. Be sure to use only the specified accessory parts. Use of other than (Check with your dealer if you are not sure.) Failure to do so may designated parts may damage this unit internally or may not result in fire, etc. securely install the unit in place. This may cause parts to become loose resulting in hazards or product failure. BEFORE WIRING, DISCONNECT THE CABLE FROM THE ARRANGE THE WIRING SO IT IS NOT CRIMPED OR NEGATIVE BATTERY TERMINAL. Failure to do so may result in electric shock or injury due to PINCHED BY A SHARP METAL EDGE. electrical shorts. Route the cables and wiring away from moving parts (like the seat rails) or sharp or pointed edges. This will prevent crimping and DO NOT ALLOW CABLES TO BECOME ENTANGLED IN damage to the wiring. If wiring passes through a hole in metal, use SURROUNDING OBJECTS. a rubber grommet to prevent the wire’s insulation from being cut by Arrange wiring and cables in compliance with the manual to the metal edge of the hole. prevent obstructions when driving. Cables or wiring that obstruct or DO NOT INSTALL IN LOCATIONS WITH HIGH MOISTURE OR hang up on places such as the steering wheel, gear lever, brake pedals, etc. can be extremely hazardous. DUST. Avoid installing the unit in locations with high incidence of DO NOT SPLICE INTO ELECTRICAL CABLES. moisture or dust. Moisture or dust that penetrates into this unit may Never cut away cable insulation to supply power to other result in product failure. equipment. Doing so will exceed the current carrying capacity of the wire and result in fire or electric shock. Precautions DO NOT DAMAGE PIPE OR WIRING WHEN DRILLING • Be sure to disconnect the cable from the (–) battery post before HOLES. installing your INE-W960/INE-NAV-60/INE-W960S. This will When drilling holes in the chassis for installation, take precautions reduce any chance of damage to the unit in case of a short- so as not to contact, damage or obstruct pipes, fuel lines, tanks or circuit. electrical wiring. Failure to take such precautions may result in fire. • Be sure to connect the color coded leads according to the DO NOT USE BOLTS OR NUTS IN THE BRAKE OR STEERING diagram. Incorrect connections may cause the unit to malfunction or damage to the vehicle’s electrical system. SYSTEMS TO MAKE GROUND CONNECTIONS. • When making connections to the vehicle’s electrical system, be Bolts or nuts used for the brake or steering systems (or any other aware of the factory installed components (e.g. on-board safety-related system), or tanks should NEVER be used for computer). Do not tap into these leads to provide power for this installations or ground connections. Using such parts could disable unit. When connecting the INE-W960/INE-NAV-60/INE- control of the vehicle and cause fire etc. W960S to the fuse box, make sure the fuse for the intended KEEP SMALL OBJECTS SUCH AS SCREWS OUT OF THE circuit of the INE-W960/INE-NAV-60/INE-W960S has the REACH OF CHILDREN. appropriate amperage. Failure to do so may result in damage to Swallowing them may result in serious injury. If swallowed, the unit and/or the vehicle. When in doubt, consult your Alpine consult a physician immediately. dealer. • The INE-W960/INE-NAV-60/INE-W960S uses female RCA- DO NOT INSTALL IN LOCATIONS WHICH MIGHT HINDER type jacks for connection to other units (e.g. amplifier) having VEHICLE OPERATION, SUCH AS THE STEERING WHEEL OR RCA connectors. You may need an adaptor to connect other GEARSHIFT. units. If so, please contact your authorized Alpine dealer for Doing so may obstruct forward vision or hamper movement etc. assistance. and results in serious accident. • Be sure to connect the speaker (–) leads to the speaker (–) terminal. Never connect left and right channel speaker cables to each other or to the vehicle body.

88-EN 3 Mounting the Microphone. Installation For safe use, make sure of the following: • location is stable and firm. • driver’s view and operations are not obstructed. • microphone is located where the driver’s voice can be easily Caution picked up (on the sun visor, etc.). Do not block the unit’s fan or heat sink, thus preventing When you speak into the microphone, you should not have air circulation. If blocked, heat will accumulate inside to change your driving posture. This may cause a the unit and may cause a fire. distraction, taking your attention away from safely driving Air ventilation hole your vehicle. Carefully consider direction and distance while mounting the microphone. Confirm that the driver’s voice can be easily picked up at the selected location. Heat sink

Microphone Rear of the Unit

Cable clamp (Sold separately) Caution concerning the installation location

1 Angle of installation Install at an angle between horizontal and 30°. Note that installing at an angle outside of this range will result in a loss of performance and possibly damage. 4 Remove the mounting sleeve from the main unit (see “Removal” on page 90). Slide the unit into the mounting sleeve and secure it.

Mounting Sleeve (Included) Dashboard 0 -30° This unit

2 Mounting the GPS Antenna inside the vehicle. 1 Clean the mounting location. Pressure 2 Put on the GPS Antenna mounting plate. Plates*1 3 Mount the GPS Antenna.

Face Plate*2 (Included)

GPS Antenna

*1 If the installed mounting sleeve is loose in the dashboard, the pressure plates may be bent slightly to remedy the problem. *2 The supplied face plate may be mounted. Antenna mounting plate

• Mount the GPS Antenna on a flat plane of the dash board or rear tray. • Some thermal reflection type or thermal absorption type glass may interrupt high frequency waves. If reception is poor with the antenna installed inside the car, try to mount the antenna outside the car. • Make sure the GPS Antenna is not covered (obstructed) by any metallic surface or object.

89-EN 5 Reinforce the head unit with the metal mounting Installation example using the Original Mounting strap (not supplied). Secure the ground lead of the Bracket unit to a clean metal spot using a screw (*1) already attached to the vehicle’s chassis. Connect all the 1 Mount the original mounting bracket to the unit leads of the INE-W960/INE-NAV-60/INE-W960S using the supplied screws. according to details described in the “Connections” Screws (M5 x 8) (page 92). (Included)

Screw Ground Lead* Hex Nut (M5)

*2 Bolt Stud

Metal Chassis Mounting Strap *1

Ground Lead This unit Original Mounting Bracket Chassis Connect all other leads of the unit according to • For the screw marked “*2,” use an appropriate screw for the chosen 2 mounting location. details described in the “Connections” (page 92).

6 Slide the INE-W960/INE-NAV-60/INE-W960S into the 3 Mounting the unit in a car. dashboard until it clicks. This ensures that the unit is * To securely connect the ground lead, use an already installed screw properly locked and will not accidentally come out on a metal part of the vehicle (marked ( )) or a clean, bare metal from the dashboard. spot on the vehicle’s chassis. • Fix the cables carefully. Do not damage them by tucking them into Removal movable parts, such as a seat rail, or by locating them against sharp 1. Insert the bracket keys into the unit, along the guides or pointed edges. on either side. The unit can now be removed from the mounting sleeve.

This unit

Bracket keys (Included)

2. Pull the unit out, keeping it unlocked as you do so.

90-EN Connection Diagram of SPST Switch (sold separately) (If the ACC power supply is not available)

ACC FUSE (5A) INE-W960/ (Red) SPST SW (Optional) (Optional) INE-NAV-60/ INE-W960S BATTERY (Yellow) FUSE (20A) (Optional)

Battery

• If your vehicle has no ACC power supply, add an SPST (Single-Pole, Single-Throw) switch (sold separately) and fuse (sold separately). • The diagram and the fuse amperage shown above are in the case when INE-W960/INE-NAV-60/INE-W960S is used individually. • If the switched power (ignition) lead of the INE-W960/INE-NAV-60/INE-W960S is connected directly to the positive (+) post of the vehicle’s battery, the INE-W960/INE-NAV-60/INE-W960S draws some current (several hundred milliamperes) even when its switch is placed in the OFF position, and the battery may be discharged.

IMPORTANT SERIAL NUMBER: Please record the serial number of your unit in the space provided INSTALLATION DATE: below and keep it as a permanent record. The serial number plate is INSTALLATION TECHNICIAN: located on the bottom of the unit. PLACE OF PURCHASE:

To prevent external noise from entering the audio system. • Locate the unit and route the leads at least 10 cm away from the car harness. • Keep the battery power leads as far away from other leads as possible. • Connect the ground lead securely to a bare metal spot (remove any paint, dirt or grease if necessary) of the car chassis. • If you add an optional noise suppressor, connect it as far away from the unit as possible. Your Alpine dealer carries various noise suppressors, contact them for further information. • Your Alpine dealer knows best about noise prevention measures so consult your dealer for further information.

91-EN Connections

GPS Antenna (Included)

Vehicle Antenna

Microphone (Included)

AUX OUTPUT To Rear Monitor Input terminal (Yellow)

REAR OUTPUT (Red/White)

FRONT OUTPUT To input terminal of amplifier (Red/White) when adding an external amplifier

SUBW (Red/White)

CAMERA To Camera with RCA Output (Yellow) terminal

REMOTE OUT To remote input lead (Brown)

REMO To amplifier or equalizer (Blue/White)

REVERSE To plus side of the back (Orange/White) lamp signal lead of the car

P.ANT To power antenna (Blue)

PARKING BRAKE To the parking brake (Yellow/Blue) signal lead

ACC (Red) Ignition key BATT (Yellow) GND (Black) Battery

(Green) Rear left (Green/Black) (White) Front left (White/Black) Speakers (Gray/Black) Front right (Gray) (Violet/Black) Rear right (Violet)

92-EN Radio Antenna Receptacle Reverse Lead (Orange/White) Video Output Connector (AUX OUTPUT) (Yellow) Connect to the plus side of the car’s reverse lamp. This lamp illuminates when the transmission is shifted into SiriusXM Tuner Input Connector (INE-W960/INE-NAV- reverse (R). 60 only) With this lead properly wired, the video picture Rear Output RCA Connectors automatically switches to the rear camera whenever the car It can be used as Rear Output RCA Connectors. RED is is put into reverse (R). right and WHITE is left. P.ANT (Power Antenna) Lead (Blue) Front Output RCA Connectors Connect this lead to the +B terminal of your power antenna, It can be used as Front Output RCA Connectors. RED is if applicable. right and WHITE is left. • This lead should be used only for controlling the vehicle’s power antenna. Do not use this lead to turn on an amplifier or a Subwoofer RCA Connectors signal processor, etc. RED is right and WHITE is left. Parking Brake Lead (Yellow/Blue) CAMERA Input RCA Connector (Yellow) Connect this lead to the power supply side of the parking Use when connecting a camera with RCA Output brake switch to transmit the parking brake status signals to Connector. the INE-W960/INE-NAV-60/INE-W960S. Remote Control Output Lead (Brown) GPS antenna Receptacle Connect this lead to the remote control input lead. This lead To GPS antenna (included). outputs the controlling signals from the remote control. ACC (IGNITION) Lead (Red) iPod VIDEO Input Connector Connect this lead to an open terminal on the vehicle’s fuse Input the iPod/ iPhone video signal or AUX video/audio box or another unused power source which provides (+) signal. 12V only when the ignition is turned on or in the accessory • Set “AUX In” (page 44) to “iPod Video” when an iPod/iPhone position. is connected. • Set “AUX In” (page 44) to “AUX” when AUX video/audio is BATT (BATTERY) Lead (Yellow) input. Connect this lead to the positive (+) post of the vehicle’s battery. USB Connector To USB Memory or iPod/iPhone. Fuse Holder (15A) MIC Input Connector Ground Lead (Black) To Microphone (Included). Connect this lead to a good chassis ground on the vehicle. Make sure the connection is made to bare metal and is Steering Remote Control Interface Connector securely fastened using the sheet metal screw provided. To steering remote control interface box. For details about connections, consult your nearest Alpine Left Rear (+) Speaker Output Lead (Green) dealer. Left Rear (–) Speaker Output Lead (Green/Black) AUX/PRE OUT Connector Left Front (+) Speaker Output Lead (White) Power Supply Connector Left Front (–) Speaker Output Lead (White/Black) REMO (Remote Turn-On) Lead (Blue/White) Right Front (–) Speaker Output Lead (Gray/Black) Connect this lead to the remote turn-on lead of your amplifier or signal processor. Right Front (+) Speaker Output Lead (Gray) Right Rear (–) Speaker Output Lead (Violet/Black) Right Rear (+) Speaker Output Lead (Violet)

93-EN System Example

Connection of an iPod/iPhone with Lightning connector or USB memory

USB connector iPod/iPhone with Lightning connector (Sold separately)

USB extension cable (Included) Lightning to USB Cable or KCU-471i (Sold separately)

USB Memory (Sold separately)

• Do not leave a iPod/iPhone/USB memory in a vehicle for a long time. Heat and humidity may damage the iPod/iPhone/USB memory and you may not be able to play it again. • An iPod/iPhone with the Lightning connector does not support iPod video playback on the unit.

Connection of a iPod/iPhone with 30-pin

USB connector iPod/iPhone with 30-pin (Sold separately)

iPod VIDEO input connector

iPod VIDEO AV extension cable KCU-461iV (Sold separately) Connection kit KCU-461iV (Sold separately) USB extension cable (Included)

• Do not leave a iPod/iPhone/USB memory in a vehicle for a long time. Heat and humidity may damage the iPod/iPhone/USB memory and you may not be able to play it again.

94-EN Connection of an External device

iPod VIDEO input connector

CAMERA/AUX/PRE OUT Connector

To Audio Output terminal To Video Output terminal

CAMERA/AUX/PRE OUT cable

DVD Changer (Sold separately)

REMOTE OUT REMOTE IN (Brown) (White/Brown)

1 AV/RCA interface cable (4-pole mini AV plug to 3- 3 RCA Extension Cable (Sold Separately) RCA) (Sold separately) 4 Remote Control Output Lead (Brown) 2 Video/Audio Input Connectors Connect this lead to the remote control input lead. This lead YELLOW is for input video, RED is right and WHITE is left outputs the controlling signals from the remote control. input the audio. • To connect an external input device to the iPod VIDEO connector, set “AUX In” to “AUX.” Refer to “Setting the AUX Mode” (page 44). • You can change the name of an external device. Refer to “Setting the AUX Mode” (page 44).

95-EN Connection of a DVD Player

To Video Output terminal

DVD Player (Sold separately)

To Audio Output terminal

iPod VIDEO input connector

AV/RCA interface cable (4-pole mini AV plug to 3- RCA Extension Cable (Sold Separately) RCA) (Sold separately) Video/Audio Input Connectors YELLOW is for input video, RED is right and WHITE is left input the audio. • You can change the name of an external device. Refer to “Setting the AUX Mode” (page 44). • To connect an external input device to the iPod VIDEO connector, set “AUX In” to “AUX.” Refer to “Setting the AUX Mode” (page 44).

Connection of a Rear Monitor

CAMERA/AUX/PRE OUT Connector

CAMERA/AUX/PRE OUT cable To Rear Monitor Input terminal

(Yellow) Rear Monitor (Sold separately)

Video Output Connector (AUX OUTPUT) RCA Extension Cable (Sold Separately)

96-EN Connection of an External Amplifier

Power Supply Connector

CAMERA/AUX/PRE OUT Connector

CAMERA/AUX/PRE OUT cable Amplifier 4 ch (Sold separately) (Red)

(White) Input Front speaker

(Red)

(White) Input Rear speaker

Amplifier for subwoofer (Sold separately) (Red)

(White) Input Subwoofer

REMOTE TURN-ON REMOTE ON (Blue/White) (Blue/White)

REMOTE ON Power Supply Connector (Blue/White)

1 Front Output RCA Connectors 3 Subwoofer RCA Connector RED is right and WHITE is left. 4 RCA Extension Cable (Sold separately) 2 Rear Output RCA Connectors RED is right and WHITE is left.

97-EN Connection of cameras

CAMERA/AUX/PRE OUT Connector

CAMERA/AUX/PRE OUT cable To Video Output terminal

(Yellow) Camera with RCA video output (Sold separately) Power Supply Connector HCE-C105, etc. Reverse Lead Connect to the plus side of the car’s reverse lamp. (Orange/White)

1 CAMERA Input RCA Connector (CAMERA) 2 RCA Extension Cable (Sold separately)

98-EN About the Rules of Bluetooth Electromagnetic Radiation Regulation USA/Canada FCC WARNING Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. This equipment complies with FCC/IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65 and RSS-102 of the IC radio frequency (RF) Exposure rules. This equipment has very low levels of RF energy that it deemed to comply without maximum permissive exposure evaluation (MPE). But it is desirable that it should be installed and operated keeping the radiator at least 20 cm or more away from person’s body (excluding extremities: hands, wrists, feet and ankles). Cet équipement est conforme aux limites d’exposition aux rayonnements énoncées pour un environnement non contrôlé et respecte les règles les radioélectriques (RF) de la FCC lignes directrices d'exposition dans le Supplément C à OET65 et d’exposition aux fréquences radioélectriques (RF) CNR-102 de l’IC. Cet équipement émet une énergie RF très faible qui est considérée conforme sans évaluation de l’exposition maximale autorisée. Cependant, cet équipement doit être installé et utilisé en gardant une distance de 20 cm ou plus entre le dispositif rayonnant et le corps (à l’exception des extrémités : mains, poignets, pieds et chevilles). México La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: (1) Este dispositivo no puede causar interferencia perjudicial, (2) este dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia recibida, incluyendo interferencia que puede ser causada por la operación no deseada del equipo (que puede causar un funcionamiento no deseado). Brasil Este equipamento opera em caráter secundário, isto é, não tem direito a proteção contra interferência prejudicial, mesmo de estações do mesmo tipo, e não pode causar interferência a sistemas operando em caráter primário.

Este equipamento está homologado pela ANATEL de acordo com os procedimentos regulamentados pela Resolução 242/2000 e atende aos requisitos técnicos aplicados.

Open only to legal US. residents./ Uniquement accessible aux personnes résidant légalement aux États-Unis./ Solo para ciudadanos residentes legalmente en EE.UU./ Aberto somente para residentes legais nos EUA Don’t forget to take a moment to protect your purchase by registering your product now at the following address: www.alpine-usa.com/registration.

N’oubliez pas de consacrer un moment à la protection de votre achat en enregistrant votre produit dès maintenant à l’adresse suivante : www.alpine-usa.com/registration.

Recuerde que con solo unos pocos pasos podrá proteger su producto, registrándolo a través de la siguiente dirección: www.alpine-usa.com/registration.

99-EN LIMITED WARRANTY ALPINE ELECTRONICS OF AMERICA, INC. (“Alpine”), is dedicated to quality craftsmanship and is pleased to offer this Warranty. We suggest that you read it thoroughly. Should you have any questions, please contact your Dealer or contact Alpine at one of the telephone numbers listed below.

PRODUCTS COVERED: You must supply proof of your purchase of the product. This Warranty covers Car Audio Products and Related You must package the product securely to avoid damage Accessories (“the product”). Products purchased in the Canada during shipment. To prevent lost packages it is recommended are covered only in the Canada. Products purchased in the U.S.A. to use a carrier that provides a tracking service. are covered only in the U.S.A. HOW WE LIMIT IMPLIED WARRANTIES: LENGTH OF WARRANTY: ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING FITNESS FOR USE This Warranty is in effect for one year from the date of the first AND MERCHANTABILITY ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE consumer purchase. PERIOD OF THE EXPRESS WARRANTY SET FORTH ABOVE AND NO PERSON IS AUTHORIZED TO ASSUME FOR ALPINE WHO IS COVERED: ANY OTHER LIABILITY IN CONNECTION WITH THE SALE OF This Warranty only covers the original purchaser of the product, THE PRODUCT. who must reside in the United States, Puerto Rico or Canada. HOW WE EXCLUDE CERTAIN DAMAGES: WHAT IS COVERED: ALPINE EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS LIABILITY FOR INCIDENTAL This Warranty covers defects in materials or workmanship (parts AND CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES CAUSED BY THE and labor) in the product. PRODUCT. THE TERM “INCIDENTAL DAMAGES” REFERS TO WHAT IS NOT COVERED: EXPENSES OF TRANSPORTING THE PRODUCT TO THE ALPINE SERVICE CENTER, LOSS OF THE ORIGINAL This Warranty does not cover the following: PURCHASER’S TIME, LOSS OF THE USE OF THE PRODUCT, Damage occurring during shipment of the product to Alpine for BUS FARES, CAR RENTALS OR OTHERS COSTS RELATING repair (claims must be presented to the carrier). TO THE CARE AND CUSTODY OF THE PRODUCT. THE TERM Damage caused by accident or abuse, including burned voice “CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES” REFERS TO THE COST OF coils caused by over-driving the speaker (amplifier level is REPAIRING OR REPLACING OTHER PROPERTY WHICH IS turned up and driven into distortion or clipping). Speaker DAMAGED WHEN THIS PRODUCT DOES NOT WORK mechanical failure (e.g. punctures, tears or rips). Cracked or PROPERLY. THE REMEDIES PROVIDED UNDER THIS damaged LCD panels. Dropped or damaged hard drives. WARRANTY ARE EXCLUSIVE AND IN LIEU OF ALL OTHERS. Damage caused by negligence, misuse, improper operation or failure to follow instructions contained in the Owner’s manual. HOW STATE/PROVINCIAL LAW RELATES TO THE Damage caused by act of God, including without limitation, WARRANTY: earthquake, fire, flood, storms or other acts of nature. This Warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also Any cost or expense related to the removal or reinstallation of have other rights which vary from state to state and province to the product. province. In addition, some states/provinces do not allow Service performed by an unauthorized person, company or limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts, and some do association. not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential Any product which has the serial number defaced, altered or damages. Accordingly, limitations as to these matters contained removed. herein may not apply to you. Any product which has been adjusted, altered or modified without Alpine’s consent. IN CANADA ONLY: Any product not distributed by Alpine within the United States, This Warranty is not valid unless your Alpine car audio product Puerto Rico or Canada. has been installed in your vehicle by an Authorized Installation Any product not purchased from an Authorized Alpine Dealer. Center, and this warranty stamped upon installation by the installation center. HOW TO OBTAIN WARRANTY SERVICE: You are responsible for delivery of the product to an HOW TO CONTACT CUSTOMER SERVICE: Authorized Alpine Service Center or Alpine for repair and for Should the product require service, please call the following payment of any initial shipping charges. Alpine will, at its number for your nearest Authorized Alpine Service Center. option, repair or replace the product with a new or reconditioned product without charge. If the repairs are CAR AUDIO 1-800-ALPINE-1 (1-800-257-4631) covered by the warranty, and if the product was shipped to an NAVIGATION 1-888-NAV-HELP (1-888-628-4357) Authorized Alpine Service Center or Alpine, Alpine will pay the return shipping charges. Or visit our website at; http://www.alpine-usa.com You should provide a detailed description of the problem(s) for which service is required.

ALPINE ELECTRONICS OF AMERICA, INC., 19145 Gramercy Place, Torrance, California 90501, U.S.A. Do not send products to this address. Call the toll free telephone number or visit the website to locate a service center. To customers/Hinweis an Kunden/A I'attention de • lmpostazione nella modallta dl rlproduzlone HDMI • HDMI-ucmo'liWK ZOJIOBIIOZOycmpoUcm8a HeJI!J3RnpoCM.ampuaam!J 1-w YE possibile configurare le seguenti impostazioni nella modal ita di riproduzione MOHumopeiJJIR3lliJHtu nacctVKupo8. noiJKJIIOI.fume HDMI -ucmOliHUK l'utilisateur/lnformacion para los clientes/lnformazioni HDMI. Per dettagli sull'impostazione di ogni voce, consultare le lstruzioni per l'uso uenocpeOcmaeHHOK MOHumopyiJJIJl 3aiJ11ux naccaJKupo8. (AUDIO VISUALSECTION). peri clienti/Till kunder/Aan klanten/Ana KnllleHTOB/Do klientow/Para os clientes 1 Ha)I(MMTe KHOnKy [HOM I) B BepxHeM 3aronOBKe. lmpostazione dellivello MX (Media Xpander)/ lmpostazione del volume di ciascuna sorgente/ lmpostazione di Visual B pe*MMe aocnpoM3Be.qeHMR HDMI Ha 3KpaHe ycTpoMcTBa 68-33122Z81 -A (Y-A3) 2 co.qep)I(MMOe 311eKTpOHHOrOyCTpOMCTBa 6y.qeT npe.qCTaBIIeHO B M3S44214010 • Specifiche (HDMI) 3epKanbHOM OTpaHCeHMM. Formato di input: 480pNGA ENGLISH • La source HDMl de l'uniti principale ne peut pas etre affichee sur le systeme de • HaCTpoiiKa peiKIIIMII aocnpOIIISBeAeHMA HDMI divertissement aux places arriere. Veuillez connecter le piriphhique compatible Bbl Mow;ere Hacrpo~TbcneAYIO~~e napaMerpbl e pew;~Menpo~rpbiBarenfl HDMI. • HDMI Compatibility HDMI directement au systfme de divertissemer1t aux places arriere. SVENSKA Anfl nony4eH~flLo1H4lopMa~~~ o HacrpoVIKe Kaw;Aoro 31leMeHTaCM. PyKOBOACTBO This unit has an HDMIInput that can playback audio and video from any • Om uppspelning med HDMI-enheten nonb30Barenfl (AUDIO VISUAL SECTION). smartphone that has an HOM I output. The smartphone cannot be controlled from Appuyez sur Ia touche [HOMI) du bandeau superieur. Enheten kan anslutas till HDMI-enheter (iPhone eller snar smarttelefoner) via Hacrpoli!Ka ypoBHfl MX (Media Xpander)J Hacrpoli!Ka 3ByKa Aflfl Ka>KAOTO the head unit while video is playing. En mode de lecteur HOMI, l'ecran du dispositif affiche le contenu 2 ~CT04H~Ka/8~3ya nbHbleHacrpoVIKa • For connecting the HDMI device, see "HDMl Connections" on the back. Use the HDMI-granssnittet och kan spela upp ljud och video med HD-signal. Men enheten du materiel electronique en miroir. visar bara den elektroniska enhetens granssnitt genom spegling, du kan inte styra Alpi11eHDMI cable to ensure proper fit for the head unit HDMI port. For details, • TexHIII'IeCKI/IexapaKTepiiiCTIIIKIII (HDMI) consult your Alpine dealer. den elektroniska enheten fri\n den har enheten. • Reglage en mode de lecture HDMI BXOAHOIA

ESPAJiJOL obslugiwaC urzqdzeniem elektronicznym za pomocq tego urz<:~dzenia. You can set the following settings in the HOM I player mode. For details on setting • Stalla in lage for HDMI-uppspelning • W celu podlqczenia Urzt)dzenia HDMI zapoznaj sif z informacjami "Polqczenia each item, refer to the Owner's Manual (AUDIO VISUAL SECTION). • Acerca de Ia reproduccion de dispositivos HDMI HDMI" dostfpnymi na tylnym panelu i u:tyj kabla Alpine HDMI pasu.jqcegodo Setting the MX (Media Xpander)/ Setting the Volume for Each Source/ Du kan gOra fOijande installningar i HDMI-spelarens lage. Ytterligare information El dispositive puede conectarse a dispositivos HDMI (lPhone u otro smartphone) a zlqcza w urzqdzeniu. Aby uzyskat szczeg6lowe informacje, naleiy skontaktowat sif Visual Setting om installning av respektive funktion finns i anvandarhandledningen (AUDIO traves de una interfaz HDMI y reproducir audio y video con una seflal HD. Sin VISUAL SECTION). z przedstawicielem handlowym firmy Alpine. • Specifications (HDMI) embargo, Ia unidad solo muestra Ia interfaz del dispositive en una imagen Stalla in MX (Media Xpander)/ Stalla in volymen fOr varje kalla/ Visual installning • Zr6dlo HDMI jed11ostkicentralnej nie moie byt wySwietlone na Systemie Tylniej duplicada y noes posible controlar el dispositive electr6nico desde esta unidad. Input Format: 480pNGA Rozrywki (STR). Proszf podlqczyt urzqdzenie kompatybilne z HDMl do STR. • Para obtener informaci6n sobre Ia conexi6n del dispositivo HDMI, consulte • Specifikationer (HDMI) "Conexiones HDMf" en el dorso y uti/ice el cable de conexiOn HDMI de Alpine que lngangsformat: 480pNGA 1 Ootknij przycisku (HOMI) na banerze gornym. corresponda al tipo de terminal del dispOsitivo. Para detalles, consulte a su DEUTSCH 2 W trybie odtwarzacza HOMI ekran urZ'!dzenia wyswietla distribuidor Alpine. zawartoSC sprzt:tu elektronicznego za poSrednictwem obrazu • lnformationen zur HDMI-Geratewiedergabe • Lafuente HDMI de Ia unidad principal no puede verse en el sistema de NEDERLANDS Das Gerat kann sich mit HDMI-Geraten (iPhone oder andere Smartphones) Uber die entretenimiento para asientos traseros (RSE, por sus siglas en ing!es). Conecte el lustrzanego. • Over het afspelen van het HDMI-apparaat HDMI-Schnittstelle verbinden und die Wiedergabe von Audio und Video mit dispositivo compatible HDMI directamente a! sistema RSE. HD-Signal durchfUhren. Das Gerat zeigt aber die Benutzeroberflache des Het apparaat kan verbinding maken met HDMI-apparaten met een HDMI-interface • Ustawianie trybu odtwarzania HDMI elektronischen Gerats nur als Spiegelbild an, Sie kOnnen das elektronische Gerat 1 Toque [HOMI] en Ia informacion superior. (zoals iPhone en andere smartphones) die voldoen bij het afspelen van audio en Dost~pnesq nast~pujqce ustawie nia w trybie odtwarzacza HDMI. Szczegotowe video in HD. Merk echter op dat het toestel een spiegelbeeld weergeeft van de informacje na temat kai:dego ustaw ienia zawarto w instrukcji obslugi (AUDIO nicht Ober dieses Gerat bedienen. 2 En el modo de reproduccion HOMI, en Ia pantalla del dispositivo • Informationen zum Anschluss des HDMI-Geriits finden Sie unter "HDMI­ interface van het elektronische apparaat en datu het elektronische apparaat niet VISUALSECTION). aparece el contenido del equipo electr6nico en una imagen AnschfUsse"auf der Riickseite. Verwenden Sie das HDMI-Verbindungskabel von kunt bedienen via dit toestel. Ustawienie MX (Media Xpander)/ Konfiguracja poziomu diwi~kudla kai:dego Alpine, das der Anschlussform des Geriits entspricht. Einzelheiten kdnnen Sie bei duplicada. • Zie "HDMl Connecties" achteraan om het HDMI-apparaat aan te sluiten en ir6dla/ Ustawianie Obraz Ihrem Alpine-Hiindler in Erfahnmg bringen. gebruik de HDMJ-aansluitingskabel van Alpine die dezelfde vorm heeft als de • Seleccion del modo de reproduccion HDMI • Dane techniczne (HDMI) • Die HDM/-Quelle kann nicht auf dem Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) System aansluiting van het apparaat. Raadpleeg uw Alpine-verdeler voor meer informatie. Puede definir los siguientes ajustes en el modo de reproductor HDMI. Para obtener betrachtet werden. Bitte verbinden Sie das HDMI-kompatiblen Geriit direkt mit • De HDMI bron kan niet op het Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) systeem worden Format wejSciowy: 480pNGA mas informaciOn sobre cada opci6n, consulte el Manual del propietario (AUDIO dem RSE-System. afgespeeld. Verbind de HDMI bron a.u.b. rechtstreeks met het RSE systeem. VISUALSECTION). PORTUGUES Beriihren Sie [HOMI) im Banner oben. Configuraci6n del MX (Media X pander)/ Ajustar el volumen para cada fuente/ 1 Raak (HDMI] aan op de bovenste banner. Ajuste Visual 2 lm HDMI·Piayermodus zeigt der Bildschirm des Gerats den lnhalt 2 In de HDMI-spelermodus wordt de inhoud van het elektronische • Sobre a reprodu~iodo dlspositivo HDMI des elektronischen Gerats als Spiegelbild an. • Especiflcaciones (HDMI) apparaat in spiegelbeeld weergegeven op het scherm van het 0 dispositive pode ser conectado com dispositivos HDMI (iPhone ou outros Formato de entrada: 480pNGA toestel. Smartphones) atraves de uma interface de HDMI e satisfazer a reprodu~aode • Elnstellung im HDMI-Wiedergabemodus audio e video com sinal HD. Porem, a unidade apenas exibe a interface do Sie kOnnen die folgenden Einstellungen im HDMI-Piayer-Modus festlegen. • De HDMI-afspeelmodus instellen dispositive eletr6nico por imagem espelhada, voc~nao pode operar o dispositive AusfUhrliche lnformationen zu jedem Element finden Sie in der ITALIANO U kunt in de HDMI-afspeelmodus de volgende instellingen instellen. Raadpleeg de eletr6nico atraves desta unidade. gebruikershandleiding voor meer gedetailleerde informatie over het instellen van • Para conectar o dispositivo HDMl, consulte "ConexOesHDMI" na parte de trtis, e Bedienungsanleitung (AUDIO VISUAL SECTION). • lnformazloni sulla riproduzione del dlspositivo HDMI Einstellung des MX (Media Xpander)/ Einstellung der Lautstarke fUr jede elk item (AUDIO VISUALSECnON). use o cabo de conexiio HDMI da Alpine que corresponde aforma do terminal do puO essere collegata a dispositivi HDMI (IPhone o altri smartphone) tramite Signalquelle/Visueii-Einstellung l'unita De MX (Media X pander) instellen/ Het volume voor elke bron instellen/ lnstellingen dispositivo. Para mais detalhes, consulte o revendedor Alpine. interfaccia HDMI per riprodurre audio e video con segnale HD. Tuttavia, l'unita voorVisueel • Afonte HDMI da unidade principal niio se pode ver no sistema de entretenimento • Technische Daten (HDMI) visualizza l'interfaccia del dispositive elettronico solo tramite immagine speculare, dos assentos traseros (RSE). Porfavor, ligue o dispositivo HDMI compatlvel Eingangsformat: 480pNGA quindi none possibile comandare il dispositive elettronico tramite questa unita. • Specificaties (HDMI) diretammte ao sistema trasero (RSE). • Peril collegamento del dispositivo HDMI, vedere "Collegamenti HDMt' sul retro e lnvoerformaat: 480pNGA utilizzare il cavo di collegamento HDMl di Alpine che corrisponde alia forma del Toque em [HDMI) na barra superior. FRANCAIS terminate del dispositivo. Per maggiori informazioni, consultare il rivenditore 2 No modo de reprodu~ioHDMI, a tela do dispositivo exibe o Alpine. RUSSIAN conteUdo do equipamento eletrOnico por imagem espelhada. • A propos de Ia Iecture d'un dispositif HDMI • La sorgente HDMI dell'unitcl principale non pub essere visualizzata nel sistema di • 0 aocnpoMsBeAeHMM yCTpoiicTBII HDMI l'appareil peut se connecter a des dispositifs HDMI (iPhone ou autres smartphones) intrattenimento posteriore (RSE). Si prega di collegare un dispositivo HDMI • Definindo o modo de reprodu~ioHDMI avec une interface HDMI et proceder a Ia lecture de l'audio et de Ia video avec un compatibile direttamente al sistema RSE. 3TO yCTpolilcreo Mow;er noAKI1104~TbCflK ycrpol1creaM HDMI (iPhone ~11~APYr~e Voc~pode definir as seguintes configura~Oesno modo de execu~aoHDMI. Para signal HD. Cependant, l'appareil n'affiche !'interface du dispositif electronique CMapnt>OHbl)c noMO~bto~Hrep«Pelilca HDMI ~BblnOilHfiTb aocnpo~ot3BeAeH~>~e detalhes sobre como definir cada item, consulte o Manual do Propriettlrio (AUDIO qu'en miroir; vous ne pouvez pas utiliser le dispositif electronique avec cet 1 Toccare (HDMI) nella barra superiore. ayA~O~>~ B~Aeo c c~rHanoM HD. 0AHaKo 3KpaH ronoeHoro ycrpo~creaHe appareil. no3BOI1fleT ocy~ecrenfiTbynpaaneH~e nOAKill04eHHbiM ycrpoHcreoM, a n~wb VISUALSECnON). 2 In modo lettore HOMI, lo schermo del dispositivo vlsualizza II Configurando o MX (Media Xpander)/ Configurando o volume para cada fonte/ • Pour le raccordement du dispositif HDM I, reportez-vous aIa section oro6pamaer ero rpacp~4eCK~YI~Hrep«Pelilc. contenuto del dispositivo elettronico tramite immagine Configura~aoVisual <

/

I

HOM

HOM

ve

i

DMI­

r

t

i

H

fO

/

l

spos

i

D

HDMI

/

fOr

HDMI

Connettori

HDMI/

I/

Anslutningskabe

/

I

Urz

HOM

/

HOM

I

O

to

HOM

DMI/Ing.3ngsanslutning

egamen

H

creo

ll

bdO

Pohtczenia

co

i

d

YCTpoiil

ingresso

i

t/

d

Cavo

Conectores

/

I

HDMI/

MI

ore

HD

HOM

nett

Con

HOMI-apparaa

HDMI/

D

conexao

conexi6n

HDMI/

de

de

le

Pa3'beMbl

Cabo

Cab

I

HDMI-enhetl

entrada

/

MI/

MI

de

HD

HOM

HD

HOMI!

Connecteurs

Conector

entrada

/

I

de

Dispositivi

pofqczeniowy

I/

HOM

raccordement

de

HOM

Conector

/

Przew6d

d'entree

Cable

I/

/

l

HDMI

HOM

Dispositive

HDMI-aansluitingen/

skabe

/

wejScia

Connecteur

/

HOMI

Zt~cze

HDMI-Anschliisse/

OOAKill04eHI-1R

Oispositif

HDMI/

HDMI-Verbindung

HDMI-Eingang

Ka6enb

/

tor

HDMI

cable/

pa3beM

ekabel/

ion

HDMI-Gerat/

rsi

connec

HDMI-kontakter/

ut

BxO.QHO~

Connectors/

/

np

i

conne<:t

device/

-conve

I

I

I

M

ingang

HOM

HDMI HOM

HO

HDMI HDMI/

Conectores

CD

®

@ () SATELLITE RADIO

SXV300 Connect Vehicle Tuner INSTALLATION GUIDE

SIRIUS Xli

WITHTMOYNTHS FREE SERVICE Minimum subscription and credit card required. See Offer Details on page 10.

$70 ''ALUE INCLUDESALLACCESS Y ~ AND ACTIVATION! ble

i

Kit.

and

1

:-l

Prep

compat

Tuner

Pad

(<~>})

your

compatible

not

Pad

features

e

r

Prep

Alcohol

to

are

a

o

Alcohol

i

for

1-866-635-2349.

Vehicle

logo

logos

Rad

R.ADY

call

this

r

Guide

~t*l

these

o

with

h

(())

er

t

s

Connect

wi

U

com

.

Satellite

m

roducts

Antenna

x

P

~ add

Products

irius

SiriusXM

to

:

.s

headunit

Mount

Compatibility

M­

sy

sX

need

www

your

t

ea

M­

riu

For

i

the

.

S

s

following

you

visi

sX

Magnetic

SXV300V1

e

and

with

th

tuner.

dedicated

Siriu

Consult

the

a

please

official

quick

e

All

Box?

instruction

the

for

everything

Tuner

includes

Headunit

SXV300

includ

ng

Tuner.

headunit.

has

i

compatible

support,

kit

the

with

purchasing

the

is

or

Vehicle

it

In

of

allow

for

Your

,

Vehicle

operational

comes

headunit logo

headunits

you

kit

SXV300

SXV300Vl

questions

your

For

What's

Thank This

SiriusXM-Ready detailed

The Ready

If Ready

Check SXV300 connector connection Install the Magnetic Mount Antenna Proper placement of the Magnetic Mount Antenna is very important. Consult a professional installer if you are uncomfortable with installing the antenna yourself. More detailed installation instructions and illustrations can be found at www.siriusxm.com/installation and clicking on the XM Vehicle Installation link. • Place the Magnetic Mount Antenna on the __... ············· outside of your vehicle on a horizontal surface ·.. ~ ...... ·-.. .· that always faces the sky. -....__~.•··• • Avoid placing the antenna near obstacles that could block a clear view of the sky (such as roof racks, other antennas like AM/FM, cellular, and GPS), preventing the satellite signal from reaching the antenna.

Select the Best Location for the Magnetic Mount Antenna For most vehicles the best location is on the roof, centered above the rear window or front windshield. Consult a professional installer to find an alternate antenna mounting location if your vehicle roof is made from a non-magnetic material such as aluminum, fiberglass, or carbon fibre. • Sedan or Coupe: Recommended mounting location is above the rear window or front windshield. • Pickup or SUV: Recommended mounting location is above the front windshield. • Convertible: Recommended mounting location is above the front windshield, or alternately on the trunk lid, on the front hood, or on top of the front fender. Route the Antenna Cable Use care when routing the antenna cable into and through the vehicle interior, avoiding sharp objects that can damage the cable. Keep the antenna cable away from moving parts such as gas and brake pedals, trunk and door hinges, and sliding seat brackets.

Hide the antenna wire inside the vehicle cabin by routing the cable under the carpet and behind plastic trim, toward the headunit location. Coil and secure any excess cable in a hidden location, such as under the carpet, using wire ties (not included). CAUTION! Do not kink or sharply fold the antenna cable. Make the Connections You'll need to access the back of the SiriusXM-Ready headunit so you can plug the SXV300 Vehicle Tuner into it. This may require you to remove the headunit from the dashboard. If you are uncomfortable with this step, consult a professional installer. Be sure to turn OFF the SiriusXM-Ready headunit before connecting the SXV300 Vehicle Tuner. Locate the SiriusXM connector on the headunit and connect the SXV300. The headunit may have a panel mount type connector, or it may have a pigtail type connector.

Connector orientation may vary PANEL MOUNT TYPE CONNECTOR

PIGTAIL TYPE To disconnect, CONNECTOR slide lock back '

Plug the Magnetic Mount Antenna into the SXV300 Vehicle Tuner. Secure the Tuner Secure the SXV300 Vehicle Tuner behind the vehicle headunit location or under the dash using wire ties (not included). Thread the wire ties through the molded brackets on the underside of the Tuner as shown. Then secure it to a bracket or wiring harness using the wire ties. Avoid brackets with sharp edges and any moving parts such as gas and brake pedals.

Reinstall the vehicle headunit if it had been removed from the dashboard.

on on

is is

you you

steps: steps:

your your

label label

hour. hour.

to to

your your

Radio Radio

a a

of of

an an

displayed displayed

that that

in in

these these

on on

subscribed. subscribed.

sure sure

to to

so so

at at

0, 0,

be be

up up

F. F.

Satellite Satellite

until until

bottom bottom

or or

visiting visiting

signal signal

message message

channels channels

on on

terms terms

take take

the the

that that

following following

S, S,

to to

by by

channel channel

SUBSCRIPTION SUBSCRIPTION

on on

0, 0,

by by

activate, activate,

may may

and and

on on

I, I,

similar similar

the the

to to

tune tune

time time

remain remain

it it

SiriusXM SiriusXM

on on

or or

label label

but but

complete complete

see see

can can

any any

find find

the the

letters letters

anytime anytime

the the

for for

at at

calling calling

will will

you you

turned turned

can can

on on

the the

headunit headunit

(If (If

is is

minutes, minutes,

you you

again again

You You

service service

use use

and and

CONTINUE CONTINUE

15 15

receiving receiving

D. D.

to to

I I

vehicle vehicle

TO TO

not not

sent sent

then: then:

Beat") Beat")

Agreement Agreement

are are

10 10

headunit headunit

A A

subscribed, subscribed,

be be

audio. audio.

activated, activated,

your your

and and

SiriusXM SiriusXM

you you

does does

Radio Radio

is is

ENTER ENTER

packaging, packaging,

takes takes

can can

Miss Miss

ID ID

Once Once

the the

Tuner. Tuner.

that that

that that

vehicle vehicle

www.siriusxm.com/activatenow www.siriusxm.com/activatenow

your your

Customer Customer

the the

to to

service: service:

SiriusXM SiriusXM

plan. plan.

to to

of of

Calll-866-587-4225 Calll-866-587-4225

of of

service service

Radio Radio

PRESS PRESS

usually usually

signals signals

our our

"Never "Never

your your

Verify Verify

Go Go

the the

your your

Vehicle Vehicle

note note

headunit. headunit.

The The

see see

your your

a a

sure sure

phone: phone:

hear hear

recommend recommend

subscribe subscribe

bottom bottom

OR OR

the the

By By

mention mention

First First

Online: Online:

www.siriusxm.com www.siriusxm.com

• •

• •

• •

subscription subscription

www.siriusxm.com/refresh. www.siriusxm.com/refresh. UPDATED, UPDATED,

When When

Activation Activation Activation Activation

on on

We We

NOTE! NOTE! Make Make

Make Make

Activate Activate

SXV300 SXV300

selected. selected. can can

the the

can can

5 5

J J

4 4

2 2

1 1

Subscribe Subscribe You You For

firmly

Your

cable

in.

fully

is

the

area.

clear is

garage,

to

Tuner.

a

garage.

your

it

message.

broken.

way

mounted

cable

of

or

is

the

antenna

this the

with

sure

specific

Customer

Vehicle

all

part

available. reference.

displayed.

bent

the

for

obstructed

our

reset

Antenna

www.siriusxm.com,

Tuner.

antenna.

make

connection

be

leaving not

not

underground

subscribe.

not

Antenna

to

at any

is

is

see

to

likely

is

outdoors

the an

to

SXV300

plugged

on,

after

general

is

Mount

may

in

Tuner

is

from

First

Vehicle

the

Mount

most

terms

headunit

it

cable

for

then

that

sky.

selected selected

signal

into

is

Replace

plan.

away

vehicle

parked

a

sure

Vehicle

off,

connection

SXV300

have have

are

the

persists,

Magnetic vehicle.

antenna

the Magnetic

complete

unit

below

messages.

make

plugged

the

1-866-635-2349

southern

you you

receive

antenna.

you

antenna

the

the

that the

for

that

damaged.

messages

SXV300

antenna if

head

call

and

of

the

into

the

subscription

listed

sure

sure message your

sure

the

the

sure

of

SiriusXM-Ready

the

should

securely

been

channel then

channel

this:

different

the

Make

Make Move Make Make has view If example,

outside

you and Turn

your

advisory

• • •

•

• •

Replace Try plugged Check

headunit

Check The and The Agreement current

I

for

and

slightly

information

(Chan

Tuner,

Chan

Guide

the

(Chek

Shorted

display

Unavailable,

Antena,

on

Unavl)

(Chek

Subscribed

User

Available

Ch

Ch

Unsub)

instructions

this

(NoSignal)

may CHK

Disconnected

Cable

Not

Not

the

Ch

Tuner

see

Ant)

Tunr)

Unsubscribed,

troubleshooting

Signal

Unavail,

you

If No

Antenna,

Check Antenna screen: Chek Antenna Antenna Unavailable, Channel Channel Unsub, Check (CH Chk Ch

Troubleshooting Consult headunit

operating The Subscription Updated­ Your subscription has been updated; press the Press enter to continue (or appropriate button (or other identified key) to continue. similar message)

If this happens: I Try this: You do not receive all the • If you have not yet activated your service, call channels to which you 1-866-635-2349. subscribe • Go to www.siriusxm.com/refresh and follow the directions to refresh your SXV300 Vehicle Tuner. No song title or artist The information may not be available or updates may name is displayed be in progress. Traffic and Weather These channels use a different audio technology than channels sound different other channels, so they often sound different from other from other channels channels. Audio fades or has static • Check all the cables for a firm and secure connection. when listening • Be sure that your headunit is correctly wired to the vehicle electrical system.

Specifications Tuner Dimensions ...... 3.42 in (W) x 2 in (H) x 0.7 in (D) 87mm (W) x 51.8mm (H) x 17.9mm (D) Weight ...... 3 oz (85 g) Pigtail Cable Length ...... 25.6 in (650 mm) Power Requirements ...... 12v DC, 0.3 A (MAX) (supplied by head unit) Operating Temperature ...... -4 oF to +158°F ( -20°C to + 70°C) Antenna Type ...... Magnetic Mount Connector ...... SMB Cable Length ...... 23 ft (7 m) Network Operation ...... XM Network Only Specifications are subject to change without notice. FCC Statement The user is cautioned that changes or modifications not expressly approved by Sirius XM Radio Inc. can void the user's authority to operate this device. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause harmful interference. 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the installation instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: • Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna of the affected receiver. • Increase the separation between the SiriusXM equipment and the affected receiver. • Connect the SiriusXM equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the affected receiver is connected. • Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. WARNING! The FCC and FAA have not certified Satellite Radio Receiver use in any aircraft (neither portable nor permanent installation). Therefore, Sirius XM Radio Inc. cannot support this type of application or installation. Patent Information It is prohibited to, and you agree that you will not, copy, decompile, disassemble, reverse engineer, hack, manipulate, or otherwise access and/or make available any technology incorporated in this product. Furthermore, the AMBE® voice compression software included in this product is protected by intellectual property rights including patent rights, copyrights, and trade secrets of Digital Voice Systems, Inc. The software is licensed solely for use within this product. The music, talk, news, entertainment, data, and other content on the Services are protected by copyright and other intellectual property laws and all ownership rights remain with the respective content and data service providers. You are prohibited from any export of the content and/or data (or derivative thereof) except in compliance with applicable export laws, rules and regulations. The user of this or any other software contained in a SiriusXM radio is explicitly prohibited from attempting to copy, decompile, reverse engineer, hack, manipulate or disassemble the object code, or in any other way convert the object code into human-readable form.

HI. HI.

All All

not not

at at

PR. PR.

a a

you you

with with

the the

our our

do do and and

a a

Radio Radio

in in

This This

birth birth

materials. materials.

also also

the the

monthly monthly

pay pay

SiriusXM SiriusXM

those those

XM XM

AK AK

products. products.

See See

until until

is is

terms terms

package, package,

card, card,

such such

apply. apply.

and and

to to

in in

in in

arrived arrived

knowledge, knowledge,

into into

must must

reserves reserves

other other

Sirius Sirius

compatible compatible

renew renew

warranties warranties

rates rates

the the

and and

only only

and and

taxes taxes credit credit

or or

of of

appliances. appliances.

cancer cancer

Access Access

reserved. reserved.

cancel. cancel.

service service

a a

you you

operational operational

which which

unnecessary unnecessary

complimentary complimentary

renew renew

complete complete

have have

to to

All All

and and

or or

area area

recommended. recommended.

product product

cause cause

not not

any any

rights rights

is is

SiriusXM SiriusXM

with with

for for

you you

any any

SiriusXM SiriusXM

our our

to to

is is

if if

regulations regulations

available available

All All

Fees Fees

electronic electronic

satellite satellite

. .

to to

paid) paid)

trademarks trademarks

any any

pay pay

is is

Package Package

3 3

service service

and and

after after

SiriusXM SiriusXM

then-current then-current

of of

and and

other. other.

contain contain

automatically automatically

are are

Tuner Tuner

plan plan

Sirius Sirius

at at

the the

installation installation

"SiriusXM-Ready" "SiriusXM-Ready"

owners

must must

laws laws

not not

California California

then then

any any

determine determine

will will

automatically automatically

service service

Agreement Agreement

rates, rates,

of of

logos logos

Our Our

you you

satellite satellite

1-866-635-2349 1-866-635-2349

local local

any any

You You

from from

does does

free free

distraction. distraction.

will will

must must

with with

packaging packaging

SXV300 SXV300

and and

at at

bill bill

DC. DC.

State State

(3 (3

for for

our our

with with

and and

Service Service

You You

installation/use installation/use

respective respective

us us

Professional Professional

current current

satellite satellite

differ differ

this this

the the

will will

subscription subscription

and and

value). value).

time. time.

marks marks

without without

Customer Customer

the the

etc., etc.,

product. product.

to to

Service Service

www.siriusxm.com. www.siriusxm.com.

call call

Tuner Tuner

Subscription Subscription

their their

Our Our

but but

we we

service service

apply. apply.

discarding discarding

then then

may may

at at

USA USA

and and

of of

combined combined

our our

any any

any any

from from

adherence adherence

of of

you you

at at

of of

related related

at at

in in

be be

installation. installation.

known known

throughout throughout

Installation Installation

convenience. convenience.

Your Your

monthly monthly

See See

when when

safely safely

taxes taxes

all all

SXV300 SXV300

bill bill

a a

terms terms

month, month,

(which (which

$18.99/mo. $18.99/mo.

until until

change. change.

your your

property property

resulting resulting

offer offer

polyethylene, polyethylene,

separately. separately.

and and

and and

(a (a

months months

to to

installed installed

limitations) limitations)

perform perform

4th 4th

cannot cannot

for for

contiguous contiguous

the the

cancel. cancel.

About About

About About

XM XM

disposal disposal

this this

chemicals chemicals

operated operated

ends, ends,

available available

are are

reinstallation reinstallation

sold sold

free free

SiriusXM SiriusXM

Fees Fees

48 48

choose choose

to to

are are

is is

be be

harm. harm.

purchase purchase

or or

your your

offer offer

complete complete

to to

subject subject

properly properly

Sirius, Sirius,

waste waste

the the

the the

provided provided

of of

cardboard, cardboard,

fee. fee.

you you

for for

you you

logos logos

to to

coverage coverage

contains contains

automatically automatically

period period

This This

in in

Notice Notice

Notice Notice

damage/injury damage/injury

products products

for for

Inc. Inc.

are are

Trademarks Trademarks

consecutive consecutive

months months

Information Information

service service

terminate terminate

with with

removal, removal,

all all

vehicle vehicle

for for

6 6

and and

3 3

will will

a a

or or

when when

(with (with

older older

subscription subscription

reproductive reproductive

Radio Radio

that that

and and

required required

product product

Purchase Purchase

Package Package

Legal Legal

Legal Legal

radio radio

first first

least least

and and

PR PR

beginning beginning

marks marks

allow allow

liability liability

XM XM

and and

guidelines guidelines

and and

and and

Agreement Agreement

instructions instructions

This This

termination termination

in in

at at

1-866-635-2349 1-866-635-2349

to to

programming programming

other other

packaged packaged

no no

ability ability

ensure ensure

installation, installation,

modify modify

18 18

the the

your your

promotional promotional

is is

Details Details

as as

at at

or or

other other

local local

Sirius Sirius

Details: Details:

to to

at at

the the

and and

or or

and and

have have

Internet Internet

us us

Radio), Radio),

early early

All All

stereo, stereo,

must must

least least

Installation Installation

Important Important

Important Important

manner manner

Hardware Hardware

cover cover right right

Our Our

Environmental Environmental

maintain maintain

You You receive receive

Customer Customer

available available

shall shall

at at

skills, skills,

the the

Inc. Inc.

Offer Offer

Offer Offer

$75 $75

fees fees

product product

defects defects

©2014 ©2014

trial trial car car Copyrights Copyrights

Follow Follow

subscription subscription

call call

and, and,

www.siriusxm.com. www.siriusxm.com. WARNING: WARNING:

of of

of of

be be

be be

OF OF

Inc. Inc.

the the

ANY ANY

to to

static static

PRICE PRICE

cost cost

140826a 140826a

will will

IMPLIED IMPLIED

BREACH BREACH

warranty warranty

replaced replaced

MONTHS MONTHS

software software

cleaners, cleaners,

accident, accident,

improper improper

purchase purchase

FOR FOR

Radio Radio

DURATION DURATION

the the

replace replace

state. state.

of of

You You

AN AN

WARRANTY, WARRANTY,

48 48

longer. longer.

This This

XM XM

or or

to to

THE THE

is is

REPLACEMENT REPLACEMENT

reinstallation reinstallation

WARRANTY WARRANTY

warranted warranted

generated generated

date date

CONSEQUENTIAL CONSEQUENTIAL

LIABLE LIABLE

PURCHASE PURCHASE

TO TO

neglect, neglect,

prepay prepay

Products Products

or or

YOU. YOU.

LONG LONG

OR OR

state state

Sirius Sirius

OTHER OTHER

are are

alteration, alteration,

repair repair

INCLUDING INCLUDING

the the

WITHIN WITHIN

preparation preparation

BE BE

refurbished; refurbished;

OR OR

TO TO

THE THE

by by

must must

will will

(SXV300VliG1010) (SXV300VliG1010)

or or

labor. labor.

from from

HOW HOW

IMPLIED IMPLIED

ANY ANY

2014 2014

from from

whichever whichever

LIMITED LIMITED

misuse, misuse,

externally externally

removal removal

REPAIR REPAIR

© ©

You You

1-866-635-7191. 1-866-635-7191.

and and

ON ON

OR OR

surface surface

vary vary

APPLY APPLY

BE BE

products products

of of

Guide Guide

ANY ANY

TO TO

caused caused

at at

option, option,

SIRIUSXM SIRIUSXM

EXCEED EXCEED

BROUGHT BROUGHT

WARRANTY, WARRANTY,

months months

parts parts

THIS THIS

NOT NOT

INCIDENTAL INCIDENTAL

which which

defect. defect.

BE BE

warranty, warranty,

sole sole

SHALL SHALL

12 12

Care Care

OF OF

for for

OF OF

batteries, batteries,

reconditioned reconditioned

OF OF

its its

installation, installation,

SHALL SHALL

the the

MAY MAY

LIMITED LIMITED

for for

Installation Installation

Warranty Warranty

damage damage

mishandling, mishandling,

elimination elimination

is, is,

at at

rights, rights,

of of

INCLUDING INCLUDING

LIMITATIONS LIMITATIONS

MUST MUST

LIABILITY LIABILITY

IS IS

for for

or or

Replacement Replacement

original original

as as

as as

charge charge

CASE CASE

Inc., Inc.,

Listener Listener

BREACH BREACH

PURPOSE, PURPOSE,

BREACH BREACH

THE THE

other other

the the

such such

NO NO

SXV300Vl SXV300Vl

used, used,

of of

ALLOW ALLOW

LIMITATION LIMITATION

defects defects

FOR FOR

incurred incurred

FOR FOR

have have

Radio Radio

center. center.

IN IN

without without

EXCLUSIONS EXCLUSIONS

as as

SiriusXM. SiriusXM.

accessories, accessories,

workmanship workmanship

description description

SHALL SHALL

WARRANTY WARRANTY

OR OR

a a

NOT NOT

of of

XM XM

SiriusXM SiriusXM

also also

OR OR

non-rechargeable non-rechargeable

WARRANTIES, WARRANTIES,

Limited Limited

costs costs

sold sold

and and

aiming; aiming;

DO DO

problems, problems,

party party

and and

PARTICULAR PARTICULAR

service service

ACTION ACTION

THIS THIS

call call

may may

remainder remainder

product product

A A

Sirius Sirius

EVENT EVENT

MERCHANTABILITY, MERCHANTABILITY,

DAMAGES DAMAGES

and and

PURCHASE. PURCHASE.

property property

the the

you you

ANY ANY

third third

IMPLIED IMPLIED

FOR FOR

NO NO

memory; memory;

OF OF

Cover Cover material material

only. only.

products products

ear-buds; ear-buds;

or or

STATES STATES

EXCLUSION EXCLUSION

please please

UNDER UNDER

of of

in in

the the

IN IN

and and

purchase purchase

LIMITATIONS LIMITATIONS

approved approved

Not Not

ANY ANY

installation installation

Americas Americas

of of

and and

Service Service

use use

THE THE

days days

an an

nature. nature.

of of

cover: cover:

SOME SOME

AND AND

FITNESS FITNESS

rights rights

placement placement

Inc. Inc.

INCIDENTAL INCIDENTAL

reconditioned reconditioned

ORIGINAL ORIGINAL

to to

of of

30 30

Does Does

the the

service, service,

Covers Covers

defects defects

OR OR

removable removable

purchaser purchaser

become become

proof proof

ABOVE ABOVE

not not

OR OR

12-Month 12-Month

or or

10020 10020

WARRANTY. WARRANTY.

SIRIUSXM SIRIUSXM

WARRANTY WARRANTY

OR OR

OF OF

or or for for

LIABILITY LIABILITY

legal legal

of of

acts acts

PRODUCT. PRODUCT.

Warranty Warranty

fasteners, fasteners,

OF OF

removal, removal,

ABOVE ABOVE

THE THE

new new

retail retail

NY NY

does does

OF OF

or or

IMPLIED. IMPLIED.

covers covers

Radio Radio

antenna antenna

LASTS LASTS

a a

product product

correction correction

DATE DATE

or or

provide provide

SO SO

warranty warranty

Warranty Warranty

Warranty Warranty

THE THE

warranty warranty

OR OR

internal internal

defects defects

specific specific

pads, pads,

IMPLIED IMPLIED

the the

WRITTEN WRITTEN

and and

to to

with with

XM XM

Obtain Obtain

THE THE

surges surges

York, York,

on on

original original

Avenue Avenue

this this

This This

This This

FOR FOR

you you

to to

LIABILITY LIABILITY

warranty warranty

warranty warranty

from from

ANY ANY

product; product;

THIS THIS

PROVIDED PROVIDED

obtain obtain

noise noise

the the

New New

siriusxm.com siriusxm.com

EXPRESS EXPRESS

FROM FROM

PAID PAID DAMAGES, DAMAGES,

WARRANTY WARRANTY

gives gives

MERCHANTABILITY MERCHANTABILITY

CONSEQUENTIAL CONSEQUENTIAL

Sirius Sirius

OF OF

OF OF

LIMITATIONS LIMITATIONS

required required

AS AS

How How

1.866.635.2349 1.866.635.2349

power power

installation installation

THE THE

shipping shipping 1221 1221

To To

product product

by by

the the

or or

What What

adhesive adhesive SiriusXM SiriusXM stored stored

free free

under under

This This

What What This This

>))

News

.

Madison

Sm1th

Joe

A

Source

Talk

language

Report

·

Sports

teat.

Piay

Talk

schedules

com/sports

·

2417

k

Lifestyle

l

Rad1o

News

Smners

Ta

Stephen

app/onhne

/

Span1sh

Tallo.

sports

and

Bleacher Combat

Play·bv

S1mulcast

/

Polllical

Talk

1rlusxm

Conversat1on

Public

Rad10

tnlormahve

the

SiriusXnl

Talk

&

by

live

1

&

Simulcast

Headlines

#

on

News

Talk

Arch

Russo

Sports

S1mulcast

American

Samts

((<

Talk

VISit

For

Talk

&

24·Hour

News

Simulcast

Simulcast

Dog

Parhsan

News

tor S1mulcast

Busmess

News

News

RADIO

::tY

available

HLN rantasy MSNBC Sports Mad Busrness Soccer

Cov1no Entertmnmg NPR

CNN's

Canada's African CNBC

Conservative FOX Non

FOX CNN Talk FOX World Progress1ve

Chrrst1an

Agnculture/Western

Independent

ot

N

.A

...::

ISSUES

I'

BY

\

/

""

.

ght

,

_

-

.i

.

..

,

""'

PUBLIC

HSNBC

~noq

~

[;:l

=

CN8C

.... ~

rfjJ

CMI

.m

r.u

/

~

~

-·

URBAN

~

~

~..!!!01

l1lji!lg\B

!:J!-1...!

-

SPORTS

p

87

8l 83 93 85

(

117

118 11~

121

113 114

115

131

116

119

123

L_

125

122

147

156

126

120

NEWS

POLITICS

RELIGION

n

Piay

·

More

Play

/

H1ts

-

969

Day

-

by

L1fe

-

ports

by-Play

Wharton

Rad10

XL

60

News

y

•1ucallon

S

1Y

.

' '

falk

I

l'lay-by

laura

Play-by-Play

a

9

E

y

for

People &

/

,

HilS

P

People by

&

NEIVS

SpJOISh

1n

Or

Talk

Pla

/

~Pl

&

by

949

Talk

NCAA

The

Talk

&

Real

-

Talk

and

Real

Shows

Norton

Sports

,

Angeles

i

th

Show-All

lalk

for

All

1

Good

920

Play

Talk

Latmo

Powered

w

.

J1m

lnsprralion

Los

English

Truckers

Sports

Rad10

MUSIC

M1ke

Ch

Sports

McCarthy

Excellence

Plays

NHL

Golf

&

and

SPORT

Doctors

Home

Talk

NHL

tor

About FM

TODAY

I

7

/

1

Talk

The

Jenny

24 Your

College Class1c

Z100 SportsCenter/FinebaumtPTI Mike

KIIS

Latmo Talk

Op1e Real Amencan HBCU Online 24 L1ve Korean Entertamment Modern

Real

Business POS1t1ve

'OR

/)

1/

lO

iJ

••

O

o

OG

~

ln

B

Jj

e

!;at

,.

:

010

tOO

ret

MA

e

lOG

C

m

m

l~s

US

OOCT

8

XTRfl4

9

"nOIO

:lotvt

TODAY

....

Vl\0 ~

t',AIO ~

rRAO

I

I( ~ E=-r

. ._

OU'OR

~ (l

opie

~

c:;r:;;

AC

~

® ~-;:ii

,

~

...

11

81

91 12

92

84

111

80

157 141

110

00

152

128

143

154

146

148

142

144 108

109

MORE

219·

190·

223

EVERY

I

n

Guy

n

Play

Cable

n

u

XL

n

tt1~

u

Foxx

969

Play-by·

·

larry

A1t-Rock

Info

Races

/

Fa111ly

Folk /

First

by·Piay

Comedy

Ste·n

Jam1e

-

&

s

&

960

Play

,

Alternative

Play-by-Play

Uncensored

AMI-AJdiO

Play

Other

Comeaa1

1

Affairs

Play

lnd1e

,

3

Pray

UncensOfed &

w1th

Talk

Ent1re

MUSIC

8 by

869

909

Country

by

News

C. Pop

-

&

-

·

by

Country Pop

Howard

iio

Foxworthy

the

Talk

Pl•y·by

157

More

880

of

800

840

Tallo.

lnd1e

Current Comedy

Play

by

.

.

Uncensored

Play lnd1e

Greatest

for &

Central

lndyCar"

Emergmg

Ch

Ch

Ch

Ch

an

New

1

NFL

MLB

NASCAR

e

e

e

Canad1an

&

NBA

NFL

MLB

Best

World

New

1

7

T1me

7

r

lin

f ·

n

The

The

t4

L1ve 21 The 24 MLB

Canadian

Online

Live Canad Francophone Canadian Francophone

Radio-Canada O New Live Comedy News/Weather New Onlin Comedy

Onlin Venzon Comedy Produced

All

:

.

J!

~

~

..

~~o

.m

Country

- ~

~

rrw

ft

__,.

.. ~

6RfR1S D

: •

~

~l!

~

~

IP

o

~

·

~ ~r

-

11.\M.!.!!.:

cz:>

88 97

98

89

68

94

95

96

90

171

173 174

159

166 167

172

162 163

1 170

189

SPORTS

176·

225·

234 Drego

Mramr

Houston

I

I

San

anta

l

At

1

Seattle

I

Worth

ly

1

Ballunore

Krds

York

l

rne

Angeles

I

More

Jazz

or

Fnrn

Channel t

&

adelphra

New

e

Los

l

1

DC

'

I

Band

appfon

Channe

Krds

Ph1

Dallas/FI

Franc1sco

Rebels

Vocals

g

Rock

Entr

1

H1ts I

Country

Gospel

by

the

&

y

Srnatra

San

the

Blues on

by

I

Gospel

Pop Musrc

H1ts/B

Sung

lor

Cor..rtry

n

Classrc

Detrort

Jazz

Boston Prttsburgh

Petersburg

Count

Washrngton

Tunes

•

MUSIC

Ustemng

Age

King's

Pop

Franklin's

Hrls

Hrts

available

ass1c

~uthcr

l

ot

Chnstran

W1lhe's B B

New

Easy 2000s

'40s Rock

Bluegrass

Krrl\

Smooth/Contemporary Pop

Krds' C Pop

Standards Show

Opera/Ciassrcal

Classrcal

rnneapolls

N

M

WEATHER

Chicago

Tampa·St

A

I

,

~

"

I

...

&

!v$1

~'W

1,11',

~~u

(

PRAJSt

Azz

Lours

f

RAO

·•"H•

~K

message IDZBOP

OUTI

ii ~

~

~

Y

~ e>cape

>i lfiiiJJ

Q/J£igh K

~

.,,,..,

..&gl

'ii

Orlando St

Phoemx

A

71

61

78

59

73 62

63

6 77

79 6

72

6G

68

69 70

60

6

TRAFFIC

\n·

n

2000s

u

&

ts

r Ellrs

H

Channel

s

'90s

l

n

Wave

H1

Rock

the

C

Channel

H1ts

Jason

House

I

Musrc

Musrc

H1ts

Grunge

lL

H1ts

Rock

S

s

Hard

from

wrth

Dance

ll

Hrts

Shows

Hop

MU

Hrts

Dance

Rock

R&B

Channel

Country

Rock

H1p-Hop

Bands

1a1

"'x

Country Hlp·llop

R&B

Suui/Motown

Beats

Hrt

Classrc

20•l0s

Ctocsncy

M

R&B

&

s

OJ

Harr

Alternat1ve

lndre

Hard

Atternat1vr./New

Allernatrve

Gartf,

REE

M

ass1c

ectronu

t

t

90s

80s

80s

80s/'90

Today's

Today's

'70s/'BOs

Heavy

Punk ED E Reggae '70s- C DowntcnwotDcep Today's /lew

Enunern's

Kenny

New Hrp·Hop/R&B Classic Ozzy

!lew

The

Adult

-F

I

l

A

S

.,.

1

ll

n

l

E

_

U

.

c:

jc

II

T~:

I C

....

caa!l•

~

'

~tr

~

IN

"

WA

~

hi~ll-·.~r

..

tfJ

I

O

®

~~

•

9!'

.;._

COEiN'ITt

or

el

~

>aYU ~

AW

r

I

.._

..

~

f

f!l:TIOII

~

CHU rg.trrh ~

J

u.

~4

tmDDUE

~r.l.~o"

f15I1ld/iwp

ijurl

~~

4

41

51

53

33

35 57

37

38

39

52

5

55 47 34 56

36 58

42

43

45

46

48

49

50

44

40

COMMFR

1

Brown

40

VJs

ers

to

Rock

Juhe

rt

TV

Top

Channels

Petty

Rock

M

!le

Brucre

r

H11s

Graceland

Move

24n

Rock

Rock

To:'l

Classrc

Songwr

c

c

i

1

Rock

from

Can

by

Garage

24n

Musrc

Cousm

Ongmal

Downtown

Amencan

Rock

Vocalists

ass

eets

argantav

l

Hrts

Rhythmic

You

HilS

24/7

C

M

Class

M

HilS

Lnn1ted·Run

wrth

wtth

w1th

With

Dead

Latm

Rock

Pop

to

assrc

Classrc

flop

l

rc/S1nger

Pop

Curated

Springsteen

t

C Pop

Jam Stevens

Songs

2417lrve

Rock

Bands

/'70s

t

Musrc

Hils Hrts

Hrts

Hrts

HIS

l

ew

70s/'80s

3rucc

flop Pop

Pop 2000s Acous Pop Today's

'60s

\vorldvii(JC Deep

Bnght ~lv1s Love

Exc!Lsrve rop Music

Gratel~l Pop Mellow

lrttle

Adu Pearl

Escape

Jam

Troprcal

N

Eclcctrc

L

c

M

lo

l

0

~~

1

:

U

"

O

•

~

s

US

ET

R

I

~1

...

II•

AYl

f

~

I

~·

V

...,

CT

N

d,,

D~

l

E

IRI

AO

Q·:

.•

~

OFT

E

I\

C

;.'!.'1:1..,_

·

ft

bli

sP

c#P.""~

·

,

~

~a

I.

;:1,~

~

f.~TRffT

~

.

VEl ·

« ~

2ove 0

~

UIP

9

111111!6' ~

"J ~ ~

(.1

Siriusxm

4

13

21

ll

1~

31

1'

19

10

1 1E

23

27

28

29

32

07 22

24

25

26

0 30

20 0- 06

OS

09

0

158

ROCK

HERE Maps Update

IN E-W960 _NAVICARD M3544194010 portant to your map

Register now and we will keep you informed of map updates and special offers.

To register, complete and return this card or visit here.com

Please tick the box tEmail ok' if you would like to receive information by email.

here.com © 2014 HERE All rights reserved. Part No. T1 000-22235. Model No. ALPINE

Email address • Adresse email • Direcci6n email

Title • Civilite • Titulo

Name/Surname • Prenom/Nom • Nombre/Appelidos

Company • Societe • Empresa

Delivery address • Adresse de livraison • Direcci6n de entrega

City/Postal code • Ville/Code postal • Ciudad/C6digo postal

Country • Pays • Pais

Telephone • Telephone • Telefono

Mobile telephone • Telephone mobile • Telefono m6vil

Fax Number • Telecopie • Numero de fax

Purchase date • Date d'achat • Fecha de adquisici6n

Car Make/Model/Year • Marque/Modele/Annee de votre vehicule • Marca/Modelo/Ano de su coche

Vehicle identification number • Numero de serie du vehicule • Numero de identificaci6n del vehiculo

D Email ok- Keep me informed • Email ok- Merci de m'informer • Email ok- Mantenme informado

Maps for Life NO POSTAGE NECESSARY IF MAILED IN THE UNITED STATES

BUSINESS REPLY MAIL FIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO. 363 OREM UT POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE

HERE PO BOX 1588 OREM UT 84059-9909 1111•1111•11·1·1·111111 1111··1111 11111···111111·1··111111111··111 Thank you for choosing Alpine for your car audio equipment needs. Our goal is to produce the best audio/video/navigation products in the world and hope your expectations are met.

Please take a moment to protect your purchase by registering your product now at the following address: www.alpine-usa.com/registration. You will be informed of product and software updates-(if applicable), special promotions, and news about Alpine. Also, by registering your product, you will automatically be entered for a chance to win various prizes such as gift cards, Alpine products, and/or a complete system.

We look forward to continue serving you in the future.

Sincerely,

The Alpine Team

French Spanish

Nous vous remercions d'avoir porte votre choix sur un Gracias por elegir Alpine para las necesidades de equipement audio automobile Alpine. Notre principal equipamiento de audio de su vehfculo. Nuestro objectif est de fabriquer les meilleurs produits audio, objetivo es fabricar los majores productos de audio/ video et de navigation au monde afin de repondre aux vfdeo/navegaci6n del mundo y esperamos poder exigences de nos clients. cumplir sus expectativas.

Veuillez prendre quelques instants pour securiser Dedique unos momentos a proteger su compra: votre achat en enregistrant votre produit a l'adresse registre ahara su producto en Ia siguiente direcci6n: suivante : www.alpine-usa.com/registration. Vous www.alpine-usa.com/registration. Recibira serez tenu informe des nouveaux produits, des mises informacion de novedades sobre el producto y a jour logicielles (le cas echeant), des promotions actualizaciones de software (si se producen), speciales et des informations concernant Alpine. promociones especiales y noticias de ultima hora de L'enregistrement de votre produit vous donne par Alpine. Asimismo, si registra su producto, entrara ailleurs Ia possibilite de gagner des dizaines de automaticamente en el sorteo de diversos premios, cadeaux, tels que cheques-cadeaux et articles Alpine, como tarjetas de regalo, productos de Alpine y/o un ainsi qu'un systeme complet. sistema completo.

Nous esperons que nos produits vous donneront Esperamos poder seguir ofreciendole el mejor entierement satisfaction. servicio en el futuro.

Cordialement, Atentamente,

L'equipe Alpine El equipo de Alpine

PART NO. 68-21627Z36-A M354415301 0